MusicMaker 2013 MusicMaker Premium 2013 En

2
www.magix.com
Copyright
This documentation is protected by law. All rights, especially the right to duplicate,
circulate, and translate, are reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced in the form of copies, microfilms or
other processes, or transmitted into a language used for machines, especially data
processing machines, without the express written consent of the publisher.
All copyrights reserved.
All other product names are trademarks of the corresponding manufacturers. Errors in
and changes to the contents as well as program modifications reserved.
Copyright © MAGIX Software GmbH, 1994 - 2012. All rights reserved.
MAGIX and Music Maker are registered trademarks of MAGIX Software GmbH.
VST and ASIO are registered trademarks of Steinberg Media Technologies GmbH.
This product uses MAGIX patented technology (USP 6,518,492; USP 6,888,999) and
MAGIX patent pending technology.
Other named product names may be registered trademarks of their respective
owners.

Preface 3

Preface
MAGIX Music Maker 2013 offers an easy start and the option to dive deeper into the
world of music production. A giant, high-quality sound archive, an especially intuitive
approach to creating original music, plus many useful functions result in an
unbeatable complete package for making your own songs.
The handling is especially easy and consistent. The included sound files can be
combined with the software synthesizers easily. MP3 songs can be used with audio
CD tracks, your own music recordings and even videos, photos or graphics. Even VST
and DirectX plug-ins or MIDI files can be added easily.
This turns your computer into a universal production studio for music and all other
kinds of multimedia files. The included CD-quality musical building blocks can all be
easily combined since they are all categorized according to tempo and harmony. And
for those of you who want to start making songs effortlessly and straight away, the
integrated "Song Maker" will take care of almost everything for you.
The tutorial (view page 21) starts off by explaining all of the basic features in the
program and then goes on to provide complete, detailed descriptions of each of the
functions. If you prefer to discover the many possibilities of the program by yourself,
you can also use the PDF manual and the Help feature as references. An alphabetical
index is included at the very end.
Have fun with MAGIX Music Maker 2013.
The MAGIX Team

4
www.magix.com
Support
Dear MAGIX customer,
Our aim is to provide fast, convenient, solution-focused support at all times. To this
end, we offer a wide range of services:
• Unlimited web support:
As a registered MAGIX customer, you have unlimited access to web support
offered via the convenient MAGIX service portal on http://support.magix.net,
including an intelligent help assistant, high-quality FAQs, patches and user
reports that are constantly updated.
The only requirement for use is product registration at www.magix.com
• The online community, on-the-spot support and a platform for exchange:
MAGIX customers have free and unlimited access to the online community at
www.magix.info, which includes approx. 150,000 members and offers the
opportunity to ask members questions concerning MAGIX products as well as
use the search function to search for specific topics or answers. In addition to
questions & answers, the knowledge pool includes a glossary, video tutorials and
a discussion forum. The multiple experts, found round-the-clock at
www.magix.info guarantee quick answers, which sometimes come within
minutes of a question being posted.
• Email support for MAGIX products:
For every new MAGIX product you will receive, as of date purchase, 12 months of
email based customer service.
Premium email support:
For priority support, or if you want the MAGIX support team to help with non-
MAGIX related hardware problems you can purchase a Premium email support
ticket. Log in at http://support.magix.net and click on "Purchase access code",
the ticket is for a specific problem, and is valid until it is solved, it is not restricted
to an email.
Please note: To be able to use the Premium email support and free product email
support via the Internet, you have to register your MAGIX product using the serial
number provided. This can be found on the CD case of your installation CD or on the
inside of the DVD box.
• Additional telephone service:
Besides the large number of free customer service offers, we also offer a fee-
based telephone customer service.
Here you can find a summary of our technical support telephone numbers:
http://support.magix.net/
Mail (Europe): MAGIX Development Support, P.O. Box 20 09 14, 01194 Dresden,
Germany

Support 5

Mail (North America): MAGIX Customer Service, 1105 Terminal Way #302, Reno,
NV 89502, USA
Please make sure you have the following information at hand:
• Program version
• Configuration details (operating system, processor, memory, hard drive, etc.),
sound card configuration (type, driver)
• Information regarding other audio software installed
MAGIX Sales Department
You can reach the MAGIX Sales Department workdays for help with the following
questions and problems:
• Orders
• Product consulting (pre-purchase)
• Upgrade requests
• Returns
Europe
Monday - Friday, 09:00-16:00 GMT
U.K.: 0203 3189218
Denmark: 45 699 18763
Sweden: 46 852 500713
Finland: 35 89 42419023
Norway: 47 210 35843
North America
9 am to 4 pm EST Mon-Fri
Phone: 1-305-722-5810

6
www.magix.com
Table of Contents
Copyright 2
Preface 3
Support 4
Introduction 12
What is MAGIX Music Maker 2013? 12
What's new in MAGIX Music Maker 2013? 12
The Features 14
Additional features of the Premium version 17
Overview of the program interface 20
Quick start 21
Play demo project 21
Previewing and loading sounds 23
Creating an arrangement 23
Editing Objects 24
Adding software instruments 25
Add videos or images 27
Effects 27
Export Arrangement 28
Burn audio CD 29
Arranger 30
Tracks 30
Track headers and Instrument icons 31
Zooming 32
Grid 33
Playback area, Start and end markers 34
Move playback marker 35
Transport Bar (playback functions) 35
Arranger buttons 37
Media Pool 38
Preview function 38
Soundpool settings 39
File manager settings 41
Instrument settings 44

Table of Contents 7

Template settings 44
Keyboard settings 45
Object Inspector settings 45
Setting Catooh 47
Mouse modes 48
Move selection 48
Move to track 48
Move all 48
Draw 49
Split 49
Stretch 49
Preview audio 49
Scrubbing 49
Replace 50
Context help 50
Arranging Objects 51
Loading and saving arrangements 51
Multimedia files and objects 51
Select objects 52
Mute objects 52
Build or split object groups 52
Splitting objects 52
Duplicate objects 53
Object handles 53
"Draw in" loops 54
Takes 54
Object properties 55
Mixdown audio 55
Audio Objects 57
Audio formats 57
Load and process audio files 57
Smart preview for the included samples. 57
Audio recording 58
Import audio CD 61
Change the playback tempo or pitch 65
Song Maker 67
Remix agent - Tempo and beat assignment 69
Remix Maker 75

8
www.magix.com
Harmony Agent 77
Text to speech 78
MIDI Objects 80
Arrange MIDI objects 80
Load MIDI files 80
Connect external equipment 81
Playing and recording MIDI synthesizer 83
MIDI Editor 84
Software Instruments 103
Opening the synthesizers 104
Synth objects 104
BeatBox 2 105
Loop Designer 112
LiViD - Little Virtual Drummer 115
Robota 116
Atmos 124
Synthesizer plug-ins 124
MAGIX Vita 126
Additional Vita Solo Instruments 128
Automation of Vita and Vita Solo instruments 130
Audio effects 132
Effects 132
Using audio effects 133
Using plug-in effects 135
Object and master effects rack 136
Equalizer 137
Compressor 138
6 Band Equalizer 139
Enhancer 140
Invert phase 141
Reverb 142
Sound Warper 145
Gater 146
Backwards 147
Timestretch/Resample 148
essential FX 149
Vintage Effects Suite 156
Vandal SE 168

Table of Contents 9

Video and Bitmap Objects 174
Video and bitmap formats 174
Video monitor 174
Loading and editing videos and bitmaps 175
Simplify object presentation 175
Video scrubbing 176
Extract sound from videos 176
Video effects 176
Title Editor 176
Video Compression 177
General notes on AVI videos 177
Mixer 179
Fader 179
Control groups 180
Track effects 180
VST and DirectX audio plugins 181
FX tracks 181
Live monitoring 182
Master track 182
Reprocess arrangement 183
Export wizard 183
Export as E-Mail attachment 184
Export as ringtone 184
Community upload 187
Additional editing 189
Burn audio CD 189
File Menu 190
New arrangement 190
Load arrangement 190
Save arrangement 190
Save arrangement as... 190
Import 190
Export 191
Backup 198
Internet 199
Settings 203
Exit 210

10
www.magix.com
Edit Menu 211
Undo 211
Redo 211
Object 211
Track 213
Range 214
Navigation 215
Select all objects 216
Menu effects 217
Song Maker 217
Audio 217
Video 222
Title 222
View menu 223
Standard layout 223
Zoom Soundpool and Keyboard 223
Arranger 223
Media Pool 224
Video monitor 224
Mix 225
The "Share" menu 226
Community upload 226
Use as background music 227
Add to music collection 227
Edit audio objects in external editors 227
Burn audio to CD-R(W) 228
Burn arrangement and used media onto CD/DVD-R(W) 228
Help Menu 229
Show welcome dialog 229
Documentation 229
Update program / Upgrade functions 230
magix.info - Multimedia Knowledge Community 230
MAGIX Screenshare 231
About MAGIX Music Maker 2013 231
Buttons overview and keyboard shortcuts 232
Toolbar 232

Table of Contents 11

Keyboard shortcuts 232
If you still have questions 239
Tips for program help 239
Uninstalling the program 239
System Requirements 239
Serial number 240
Publishing works created in MAGIX Music Maker 2013 241
More about MAGIX 242
MAGIX Online World 242
magix.info 242
Soundpool DVD Collection 243
Index 244


12
www.magix.com
Introduction
What is MAGIX Music Maker 2013?
MAGIX Music Maker 2013 is the ideal program for creating professional sounding
recordings without having to learn any complicated musical theory. You can simply
combine the professionally produced loops in the intuitive arranger and mix them to
create your own personal sound.
Are you aiming for a unique sound that will set you apart from the crowd? Then try
creating your own special sounds with the included software synthesizers or load
your own plug-in synthesizers. High-quality effects help to give your tracks the final
polish or you can take things in the other direction and distort them until they are
almost unrecognizable. Express your own creativity by recording your vocals or
instruments and adding them to the arrangement.
Whether rock, techno or film music, you can produce all kinds of tracks using the
wide range of styles available in the program. When you combine elements from
different style libraries the tempo is adjusted automatically to make sure your
arrangement fits together perfectly. Who knows? Maybe flamenco rock or country
techno is the next big thing.
If you need even more sounds and samples, Catooh offers a rich selection of audio,
video, images and professionally created sound effects, which can add even more
variety to your project.
Or how about a remix? Load up your favorite hits from the past and add some fat
bass or a totally modern beat! When you load audio CD tracks and MP3s into Music
Maker the tempo of the song is recognized and adjusted to fit the arrangement. The
track can also automatically be cut into loops.
But music alone isn't everything! You can import images and video files to your
arrangement, include text and add video effects and cool visuals. The finished video
can be directly exported from Music Maker and posted on MAGIX Online Album,
Youtube or Facebook
What's new in MAGIX Music Maker 2013?
New Sounds and Loops
As usual there is a brand new sound archive with various styles ranging from "trendy"
to "retro". In addition to the included sound loops, an additional 1000 loops can be
downloaded for free from the Internet. To download sounds, click on the "Catooh"
button after installing the software and follow instructions.

Introduction 13

New Synthesizers
The Vita Sample Player has a new interface and a lot more instruments like the new
Vita Solo Instruments String Ensemble and Rock Drums and the Bass Machine and
World Percussion included in the Premium version.
Improved Interface
The user interface and the workflow have been improved and simplified. The main
windows for the arranger, the Media Pool and the video monitor (peak meter) can be
adjusted for size and position and the track height is now completely customizable.
Improved Soundpool Control
The Soundpool display has been completely redesigned and many of the most
important functions have been enhanced. You can now use the full text search to find
loops and list them according to pitch or type, i.e. MIDI or audio loops. You can also
filter the search to display only the favorites that you have selected. The sample list
can also be sorted according to properties, e.g. key, bar length, date, etc.
Improved Compatibility
Music Maker arrangements can be opened in Music Studio 2013. All of the functions
in Music Maker are reconstructed perfectly in Music Studio. In the rare case that this
doesn't work, you can also export arrangements from Music Maker as single tracks.
More Tracks
The number of tracks you can use in the Premium version is unlimited and has been
increased from 64 to 96 in the standard version.
New Program Performance Features
Music Maker can now be started faster and has been enhanced for better
performance and stability. The new WASAPI driver support (starting with Windows
Vista) for audio playback reduces latency (delays between hitting a note on the
keyboard and the production of sound) and provides more stability. It's also a good
alternative to ASIO divers for complicated audio output devices.
Improved Audio Effects
The parametric equalizer has a redesigned interface and six channels instead of four.
The new and improved Premium version also includes the Vintage FX Suite, essential
FX Suite and the Mastering Suite.
Additional features new in the Premium version
• Larger sound archive: Over 5000 new sounds and MIDI loops from all genres can
be accessed via the "Soundpools" button in the Media Pool.
• Essential FX Vocal Strip: This combination of effects is specifically designed for
editing speech and vocal recordings.
• Two Brand New Synthesizers: World Percussion offers a huge selection of
percussion instruments like bongos, congas or timbales that are perfect for

14
www.magix.com
creating Latin American rhythms or simply adding an exotic flair. The Bass
Machine is special synth for creating booming bass sounds for Dubstep and Hip
Hop productions.
The Features
Multimedia Library
The included multimedia library provides audio and video building blocks ("samples")
that can be combined in the arranger. The program also offers lots of melodies, effect
presets and graphic animations that you can add to your songs and video clips. In
short: just about anything can be combined with anything else. The sky's the limit to
your creativity.
BeatBox 2
BeatBox 2, the new groove synthesizer, lets you make great beats with ease. It can be
accessed in the Media Pool via the "Synthesizers" button. Easy mode must be
switched off to access it.
Audio Effects
MAGIX Music Maker 2013 provides lots of different audio effects. A short overview:
• You can correct tempo and pitch in real time using Resampling, Timestretching
or Pitchshifting.
• The Audio Effect Rack supplies Reverb, Echo, Equalizer, Compressor, Time
Processor, Distortion, Filter - all classic effects which can be used to produce
almost any sound. The reverb effect, for example, provides professional, realistic
reverb algorithms to add depth and spaciousness to your material.
• The Gater enables rhythmic splitting of surface sounds
• Vandal SE is a guitar amplifier from MAGIX. You can adjust all the typical
settings on its realistic user interface.
• essentialFX: important bread-and-butter effects that are embedded like VST
plug-ins.
• The Vintage Effects Suite covers "good old" guitar effects that were activated
using a foot pedal in Jimi Hendrix's era: more warmth and fullness with Chorus,
jet-like special effects with the Flanger or ping-pong effects with Delay. The Filter
enables tempo-synchronous frequency filtering.
In general, there are three ways of implementing filters:
• Object effects: Effects for selected objects. These effects can be found in "Effects
> Audio > Audio effects" or in the context menu (right mouse click).
• Track effects: Effects for complete tracks. These effects can be found in the track
box or in the mixer channels.
• Master effects: Effects for the overall sound. These effects can be found in the
mastering area of the mixer ( or in the "Effects" menu).

Introduction 15

Note: In the track box, you will only find pre-configured track effects, while the mixer
channels contain editable effect devices.
Media database
Find your recordings, sounds, pictures, and videos quicker and faster with the MAGIX
media database. An existing MAGIX database from the MAGIX Photo Manager or
MAGIX Media Manager is integrated in the Media Pool and can be updated directly
from MAGIX Music Maker 2013. Use the simple search function to find suitable
pictures or MP3 files for your arrangement.
Import
You have the following options for using your own material:
• Audio files in a wide range of formats. You can also use MIDI, video and bitmaps.
The files can be dragged to a track from the Media Pool with a held-down mouse
key (drag & drop). You can find a list of supported formats below (view page 16).
• Audio CDs can be imported directly in the program. Simply place the CD into the
drive and press "CD/DVD" and all the tracks are ready to be dragged & dropped
into the Arranger. Whether for remixes or as sound material for your own
compositions - your personal CD collection has a whole new meaning.
• Use the recording function to record vocals, noises, or instruments and integrate
them into the arrangement.
High-end 32-bit floating point
All sound changes are executed using 32-bit floating point calculation for especially
differentiated and high-quality sounds. This technology is also used in professional
studios. This way, an audio picture with especially high dynamics can be created.
Digital overmodulation and clipping become virtually impossible.
Own recordings
Use this recording function from MAGIX Music Maker 2013 to record vocals, noises,
or instruments and integrate them into the arrangement.
Audio & MIDI
The MIDI format is extremely important in modern music production. You can use
MIDI files to control external devices such as synthesizers and samplers and internal
software audio generators such as VST plug-ins from your computer.
With MAGIX Music Maker 2013 you can arrange, load, record, edit, and play MIDI
data just as easily as audio data. For MIDI recordings and editing you can use the
specialized MIDI Editor with Piano Roll, Drum Editor, Velocity/Controller Editor and
Event List. Recording can be started directly from the arranger by setting the
recording mode in the track header to "MIDI record" or "Audio record".

16
www.magix.com
VST Support
Now it is possible to use external VST instruments and effects in all MAGIX Music
Maker 2013 versions. A wide range of DirectX and VST plug-ins are offered in retail
stores or directly on the Internet, greatly expanding the possibilities of MAGIX Music
Maker 2013.
VST instruments and effects are external programs, which must first be installed
before being used in MAGIX Music Maker 2013. You can then find them in the mixer
plug-in slots and in the track boxes at the start of every track. VST effects are applied
to an entire track. VST instruments are controlled by MIDI objects.
Mixer
MAGIX Music Maker 2013 contains a professional real-time mixer with an Effect
Rack and two Insert Effects per channel and for the Master, as well as additional
Mastering Effects. You can group a number of faders of a specific type (for example,
volume or panorama) and use them all together by holding down the Ctrl key. The
quickest way to open and close the mixer is by using the M key.
Harmony Agent
The Harmony Agent provides harmony recognition automatically and determines the
key and chord of any music title. See the guitar tablature of your favorite song in real
time for the arrangement!
Formats and interfaces
Import: WAV, MP3, OGG Vorbis, WMA, QuickTimeTM, MIDI, CD-A (without copy
protection), BMP, JPG, AVI, MXV, WMV
Export: WAV, MP3, OGG Vorbis, WMA, QuickTime, MIDI, BMP, JPG, AVI, MXV,
WMV, CD-A (Premium version)
Song Maker
The Song Maker lets you create new arrangements quickly and easily and
complement existing arrangements by automating the complicated steps such as
sample selection and combination. The Song Maker takes over arranging whole
sections such as intro and refrain. Therefore, you do not have to do everything
yourself – you can omit the arranging and process your selection from the
suggestions.
InfoBox
Thanks to the new info box, all important functions can be easily understood as they
are applied. Just hold the mouse over a button that you would like to learn about and
read the info text in the preview monitor.

Introduction 17

Live Sessions
While the virtual instruments and sounds are played on the available tracks, a new
track can be recorded simultaneously in realtime. What's more, you can also add
realtime effects.
SoundVision
SoundVision is a new way of visualizing music which shows audio material at a glance
in the form of a musical galaxy. Similar sounds are clustered close together; different
sounds are organized further apart. SoundVision can be activated in the Media Pool
via the corresponding button. Easy mode must be switched off to access it.
Internet upload to many platforms
When the song is finished, it should be heard not just by your friends, but preferably
the whole world. This is achieved, naturally, with the help of the web. Under "File >
Export > Community upload" you will find the most impotant communities, where
you can upload your songs.
Additional features of the Premium version
Additional Audio Effects
• Elastic Audio for total control over vocals. Voice samples or melodies you sing
yourself can be "tuned" to match automatically. With the "Harmonizer" in the
Elastic Audio Editor, you can add a suitable second vocal or a whole choir to a
specified melody.
• Vocoder: Produces distorted vocals from synthesized sounds.
• Mastering Suite: A special effect rack for "Mastering". In this process, the mixed-
down music track is "polished" using parametric equalizer, multimax, limiter and
stereo enhancers. All this can be found in the mixer (M key).
• Am-Track SE: This analog vintage compressor produces an especially warm,
pumping sound. Launch it via the effects menu for selected audio objects or via
the plug-in slot in the mixer.
Additional Styles & Samples
More content: The Premium version comes with more styles and ca. 2,000 additional
samples.
Additional Instruments
• Revolta 2: An analog, especially variable and "professional" sounding, 12-tone
synthesizer. With sound matrix, noise generator and nine effect types.
• BeatBox 2 plus: The ultimate groove tool with even more drum kits, automations
and an even more flexible effects section.
• New features: Century Guitars & Electric Bass.

18
www.magix.com
Object and track curve automation
Effect and volume progressions can be controlled using freely drawable curves – for
individual objects as well as for complete tracks. In addition, you can fade an echo in
or out at a specific position in the song by drawing in a curve peak at the
corresponding position.
Video recording
In addition to audio recording, MAGIX Music Maker 2013 provides a recording
function for video from analog video sources for your own video clips.
DirectX and VST plug-ins
MAGIX Music Maker 2013 enables the direct use of DirectX and VST plug-ins, a large
variety of which is available in retail stores or directly online. Such plug-ins (audio
effects or synthesizers from third party manufacturers) can significantly increase the
functionality of MAGIX Music Maker 2013.
MAGIX Mastering Suite 2.0
Impressive studio sound just like you hear on store-bought CDs! MAGIX Mastering
Suite is a special effects rack for use with the mixer master channel. The included
effects help you with so-called "mastering"; put the final touch on your completed and
mixed music piece using parametric equalizers, MultiMax, limiter, and stereo
enhancers.
Real 5.1 Surround Sound
MAGIX Music Maker 2013 deluxe provides real 5.1 Surround Sound. 5.1 Surround is
the preferred home cinema sound format, which is also supported in the Premium
version when importing, editing, and exporting. With the 5.1 Surround Editor you can
move your sound around the room.
MAGIX Music Editor
Detailed audio editing in real time and specialist for CD burning, sound restoration,
sampling and audio editing.
Revolta 2
Revolta 2 is a powerful-sounding, varied 12-voice analog synthesizer with highly
advanced functions, sound matrix, noise generator, and a complete effects section
featuring nine effect types.
This synthesizer can create any electronic music you can imagine. The sound presets
were created by sound designers for Access Virus and Rob Papens Albino, which
makes Revolta 2 the number 1 choice for beginners and professionals alike.
Also in the Premium version
• Additional tracks: The Premium version offers unlimited tracks (instead of 96 -
more space for even more complex arrangements.

Introduction 19

• Timecode sync: For creating songs in teams on multiple PCs. Simply connect two
notebooks to each other via MIDI and jam together.
• MIDI step recording: Provided for composers unsure of their keyboard playing
skills who want to play perfect melodies. The MIDI editor can be opened by
double-clicking on a MIDI object.
• ReWire: For embedding of other music programs. Programs such as
Propellerhead Reason or Ableton Live can be controlled in MAGIX Music Maker
2013 like a software synthesizer using MIDI objects.
• Video recoding: In addition to audio recording, MAGIX Music Maker 2013
Premium provides a recording function for video from analog video sources – for
your own video clips. It can be found in the "File" menu under "Import > Video
recording".
• Curve automation: Effect and volume progressions can be controlled using freely
drawable curves – for individual objects as well as for complete tracks. In
addition, you can fade in or out an echo at a specific position in the song by
drawing in a curve peak at the corresponding position.
• MAGIX Music Editor: Detailed audio editing in real time and specialist for CD
burning, sound restoration, sampling and audio editing.
• MAGIX Xtreme Print Center for quickly creating CD covers, inlays and labels.

20
www.magix.com
Overview of the program interface


Menu bar This bar provides the most important editing commands.

Toolbar This contains the buttons for quick editing and the different
mouse modes.

Track headers Complete tracks can be turned on or off (muted) or played
separately (solo). Use the FX buttons to apply track effects.

Arranger You can freely position any multimedia material on all of the
arranger's tracks.

Transport console In the middle you'll find the volume control, the transport
console for the playback functions and the tempo display.

Zoom functions Here you can enlarge or reduce the view. The horizontal
scrollbar can be stretched and compressed for zooming.

Media Pool All files listed here can be added to the arranger using drag
& drop.

Arranger buttons Buttons for displaying the mixer, Live Performer and video
monitor with peak meter.
The arranger, video monitor and Media Pool can be positioned anywhere on the
screen or completely hidden. In the "View" menu (F11 key) you can reset the standard
layout for Music Maker.

The maximize buttons on the arranger, the video monitor and the Media Pool let
you display them on the full screen, e.g. to make positioning and editing objects
in the arranger easier.
For very large arrangements, the video monitor can be used as an overview display
(Menu -> Video monitor -> Arrangement overview).

Quick start 21

Quick start
This chapter explains the basic functions of MAGIX Music Maker 2013 with a step-
by-step introduction. A systematic description of all program functions can be found
towards the end of the manual.
Tip: Watch the introductory videos and learn some tips and tricks from other users
at magix.info http://www.magix.info/de/suche/Music+Maker/.
Play demo project
When MAGIX Music Maker 2013 is started for the first time it will display a welcome
screen.

To get an idea of what Music Maker can do, click on "Load demo song" and select a
demo song from the menu. Once it is loaded, the Music Maker interface will be
displayed.


22
www.magix.com

The large area with the horizontal tracks is the arranger. The colored rectangles are
objects. They represent various samples, synthesizers and other sounds. There are
also objects for titles, images and video files.
Look at the individual tracks of the song in the arranger: In MAGIX Music Maker 2013
you can create a complete song by compiling objects. Click on the vertical scroll bar
on the right-hand side of the screen and drag them down (hold down the left mouse
button) in order to be able to see each track.
In the middle you'll find a large volume control, the transport console (view page 35)
and some buttons for opening important windows..
In the lower section of the program interface you can find the Media Pool. You can
switch between the different areas. In Soundpools you will find the included loops
that you can load into the arrangement by drag & drop while holding the mouse key
or by double-clicking.
To play the demo, click on the Play button with the mouse or press the space bar on
your keyboard. A vertical red line (the playback marker) runs across the screen and
music will play from the speakers.
Note: If you do not hear anything, check if the correct sound card is active for
playback in the Setup window (P key). Also make sure that the output of the sound
card is connected to the speakers.

Quick start 23

Previewing and loading sounds
Now you can load your first sound into the arranger.

Create another new, empty arrangement. Simply click on this button.
• Now click on "Soundpools" (1) in the Media Pool.
• Various "Styles" (2) are shown on the left hand side of the Media Pool. Styles
represent particular musical genres. Click on one of the styles to display the loops
that match this genre.

• Now, select which instrument you would like to use under instruments (3). On
the right all of the loops (5) will be listed and you can select the sound you want.
The selected sound will play back automatically.
• Most instruments are categorized according to pitch. Click on the pitch (4) to
listen to the sound in the corresponding pitch. Other instruments, like drums, are
not categorized according to pitch.
• To load a file into the arranger, simply press the Enter key. You can also drag the
file from a table onto a track in the arranger. Once you let go of the mouse button,
the file will appear as an audio object (or MIDI object) at that position.
Creating an arrangement
Start playback now.
To load new samples into the arranger, you do not need to interrupt playback. MAGIX
Music Maker 2013 has a "Smart Preview" function: You can simultaneously preview
new samples in the Media Pool – they always run in sync with the song in the
arranger. This function considerably simplifies the search for suitable samples for a
song you wish to create.


24
www.magix.com
This way, any number of loops from any style can be dragged from any folder into the
arranger and placed on top of one another, on multiple tracks, or behind one another.

Take note of the two markers at the top of the bar ruler – they represent the start and
end points of the range to be played (playback range). Playback is "looped" in this
range which means that it repeats continuously. New loops can be added when
possible.
If you want to create a new part for the song you can reposition the start marker by
left-clicking on the bar ruler and the end marker by right-clicking on the bar ruler. Or
you can use the right arrow key to move the playback area its entire length to the
right.
Each object can be moved in any way in the arranger with the mouse, horizontally on
a track as well as vertically between tracks.
Note: There is one important limitation to the movement of objects on tracks. The
Soundpools contain two different kinds of loops: audio & MIDI. You can recognize
MIDI loops by their icon in the list. You can recognize MIDI loops by their
corresponding icon in the list . These loops only produce a sound when
combined with a software synthesizer (view page 102). This synthesizer is
automatically loaded to the track where the MIDI object is placed. These objects
should not be moved to other tracks once the synthesizer is loaded to a particular
track.
Editing Objects
Even though it's possible to make great arrangements with the audio building blocks
provided, you will probably get to a point where you want to add your own personal
touch by shortening or removing objects or adjusting the loops in specific areas.
All objects can be shortened or looped by moving the mouse to one of the lower
corners of the object until it turns into a stretch symbol. You can now stretch or
compress the object length as much as you like. If you make the object longer than it
originally was, it will be played back as a loop. This way you can create rhythm tracks
from short drum samples simply by stretching them.
If an object is selected, additional "handles" will appear on it.


Quick start 25

At the top corners of every object there are two fade handles that can be adjusted to
fade an object in or out. The handle at the top center can be used to adjust the volume
of audio objects and the transparency of video objects.
All objects can be split into multiple objects. To do so, select "Split objects" from the
"Edit" menu. The selected object will be split at the position where the playback
marker is.

This can be done even faster using the special splitting mouse mode, found in
the mouse mode button in the tool bar, or by pressing Alt + 6.
Right-clicking on an object opens the context menu with the options available for that
specific object in the Timeline mode.
Tip: You'll really notice the advantages of object-based editing when you start to use
Object Effects! You can apply audio effects to each individual audio object. For
example, you can cut a sample to create an object for the last beat before a pause in
the arrangement and add an echo effect! Or create a some crazy drums by applying
various filter effects to each beat in the loop. There's no limit to the creative
possibilities!
Adding software instruments
The included audio loops in the Soundpool are of the highest quality and melodically
synchronized. But sometimes it's good to have a bigger selection of beats and
melodies or a way to create your own ideas. In this case you need software
instruments.
While audio objects consist of pre-made recordings, the sound from software
instruments (synthesizers) is created during playback on the computer. The resulting
sounds are not as refined but allow for total control of every musical detail.
A selection of the loops included in Music Maker are intended as control files for
software synthesizers (MIDI loops). The sound progressions of these loops can be
edited in the MIDI Editor (view page 80). You can also record your own melodies by
connecting a MIDI keyboard.
In MAGIX Music Maker 2013 a distinction is made between VST instruments and
object synthesizers.
Object synthesizers are standalone objects in the track and can be moved, cut and
arranged just like any other objects. Various object synthesizers can also be put
together on one track. The control of the sound creation takes place within the object
synthesizer.

26
www.magix.com
VST Instruments are always loaded to one track and controlled by MIDI objects in the
track. MIDI objects only contain control information (notes) that is used to create
sounds in VST instruments. Various MIDI objects arranged on one track control the
same synthesizer and that means a maximum of one instrument per track.
To open the folder with the software instruments in MAGIX Music Maker 2013
switch to the Instruments folder in the Media Pool.

• As with all Media Pool objects, the instrument that is selected will automatically
produce a preview sound.
• Drag the desired synthesizer into an arrangement track by holding down the
mouse button.
• For object synthesizers a Synth Object will be created and a settings dialog for
the synthesizer will open. You can "program" the synth here. The resulting Synth
object can be moved, cut, stretched or adjusted with effects just like an audio
object.
• VST instruments are loaded to a track and a preset MIDI object is added to the
track. Double-clicking on it opens the MIDI Editor where you can make
adjustments to the melody.
• Or you can switch the the Media Pool Keyboard view. Here you can play the
synthesizer using your computer keyboard. You can also record your playing by
clicking on the large red record button.
Tip: You can access the sound programs of the included VST instruments Vita 2 and
Revolta (only Premium version) with the button on the far left of the track.
Experiment with the various synthesizers in MAGIX Music Maker 2013 and take
advantage of each of their individual strengths.

Quick start 27

Add videos or images
Perhaps you would like to make a video clip? To do so, open a folder with video or
photo files in the Media Pool under Data Manager and select the ones you want to
use in your project.
You can activate a video monitor using the middle button on the right below the
arranger.

A preview of the selected video file is shown on the video monitor.

Once you have found a matching video,
use the mouse button to drag it onto any
track (like previously with the audio files).
You can place as many video and photo
files as you like under your music.
You can adjust the length of the individual
image objects with the help of object
handles (view page 24).
In the Media Pool templates you will also find animated text templates (view page
176) (Titles), video effects (Video FX) and visualizations that you can use to spice up
your videos.
Effects
You should take time to experiment with the effects. In the context menu you can
select the effects for the objects. Effect modules can be opened and adjusted to get
the exact sound you want.
Effects can also be dragged onto objects by holding the left mouse button or double-
clicking. Simply open the Templates folder in the Media Pool and test out the effects
listed in Audio FX by clicking on them. As with all other entries in the Media Pool,
effects in this folder always have a preview as well. If you like an effect and wish to
apply it to an object in the arranger, simply click on it, drag it onto the object, and
release the mouse button.

28
www.magix.com
Tip: Use the object inspector in the Media Pool to display all important object
effects.
Another option for using effects is to apply Track Effects. These effects influence all
of the signals on a track making it a quick way to apply the same effect to several
objects. They also affect the audio output of track synthesizers. There are no audio
effects available for MIDI objects so object effects can't be used on them.

You can also select from a variety of useful track effect presets by clicking on
the button on the corresponding track. These are organized according to the
instruments and applications.

Export Arrangement
When your arrangement is ready, you would normally want to do something with it
"out in the real world". For example, show it to friends. To do so, you must first export
your work from MAGIX Music Maker 2013.
You can find the most important functions in "File > Export > Common export
functions".

• Export as MP3: You can transfer your
arrangement in MP3 format to a
portable player.
• Burn onto CD or DVD: The classic
way to present music. You can burn
single songs or complete albums
directly to CDs.
Tip: In the Premium version, you can
use the integrated CD mastering and
burn program to do this. Click on "File"
and select the "Export arrangement ->
Burn audio CD-R(W)" option to export
your arrangement. The arrangement
will be loaded into the CD mastering
program MAGIX Music Editor and can
be burned straight to disc from there.

Quick start 29

• Upload to the MAGIX Online Album: When the song is finished, it should be
heard not just by your friends, but preferably the whole world. The easiest way to
do this is with a MAGIX Online Album of your own.
• Publish on Facebook (YouTube/SoundCloud): With these options you can
publish directly on the popular online platforms.
• Export in various formats: In the "File > Export" menu you will also find all
supported export formats for creating an audio or video file (for music videos)
from your arrangement.
Note: The export calculations don't affect playback performance. Even if playback on
your computer begins to stutter because too much RAM is being used for videos
and effects, the export file will still be calculated correctly. We recommend placing
already finished passages of complex arrangements via the export or mixdown
function into a single file to free up some processing power (and tracks). This kind of
file can be reloaded into the arrangement and edited further with the other parts.
Burn audio CD
To burn an audio CD, first export your arrangement as a WAV file:
• Click "File" and select the "Export arrangement -> Audio as wave..." option.
The WAV file created can be burned as an audio CD with the included burn program
MAGIX Speed burnR.
Tip: You can use an integrated CD mastering tool in the Premium version and a burn
program to do this. Click on "File" and select the option "Export arrangement -> Burn
audio CD-R(W)" to export your arrangement. The arrangement will be loaded into
the CD mastering program MAGIX Music Editor and can be burned straight to disc
from there.

30
www.magix.com
Arranger
Tracks
The arranger is organized into tracks. Each track corresponds to a channel on the
mixer (view page 179). You can use this channel to control volume, apply effects,
mute or solo all of the objects in the track. The loops of the same instrument are
typically grouped together on one track (bass track, vocal track, etc.) which makes it
easier to edit them.


Additional tracks can be added with the button at the bottom of the arranger
or by selecting the "Add track" option in "Edit" menu (Ctrl + I)
In total, up to 96 tracks can be used for an arrangement. To move a track you can
open the Effects menu (view page 31) of the track and select "Move Track Up" or
"Move Track Down". Tracks cannot be deleted, but those that don't have any audio
objects are automatically deactivated and that means they don't use any computing
power!
If the tracks in the arranger are not long enough, you can increase their length by
pressing the minus button (-) to the right. The size of the arrangement adapts itself
automatically when objects exceed the space for them on the right-hand side or when
new objects are loaded.

Arranger 31

Track headers and Instrument icons
At the beginning of each track there is a track header with controls and displays.


Instrument icon: When you drag & drop a MAGIX Soundpool sample onto an
empty track an icon will appear in the track header. You can replace this icon by
right-clicking on it and selecting a different one. A left-click on the icon opens
the menu for the track synthesizer (see below).

The Peak Meter can be found beside the icons. This way, you can control the
volume of the track and see if the track produces any audio sound at all.

The track name is located to the left of the track number. You can rename the
track by double-clicking on the field.

You can use the Mute button to shut off the sound of a track or the Solo button
to play only the sound from one particular track. The Solo function is not
exclusive which means you can use it to play back the sound from several tracks.
On the lower border of the arranger underneath the track headers you will find
the buttons Reset Solo / Mute which you can use to restore the previous solo
and mute settings of all tracks with one click.


Left-clicking on the field with the instrument icon opens a menu with the
sounds from the included software synthesizer which can be loaded to
the track. This software instrument will then be used by all MIDI objects
in the track. You can find out more about this in the chapters Software
Synthesizers (view page 102) and MIDI objects (view page 80).
The track header of a track with a loaded synthesizer has a
few additional controls. With the arrows (2, 4) you can
switch back and forth from the previous to the next sound
in the software instrument and the gear icon (3) opens the
instrument editor.

Here you can open the Track Effects menu. In it you will find presets for
track effects sorted according to the instrument type.
With the "Move track up/down" commands you can sort your tracks.

With REC you can activate the track for an Audio or MIDI recording.


32
www.magix.com

A simple click puts the track into Audio Recording mode. This also
activates monitoring which means you can hear the input signal of
your sound card during playback. (Find out more in the "Mixer"
chapter, "Recording/Live Monitoring" (view page 182)) If you start
recording now (R key), the audio recording dialog (view page 60) will
open. The recorded audio material is added to this track in the
playback range (view page 34).

Clicking this button again puts the track into MIDI Recording mode. If
a software instrument is loaded, you can play it with a hooked-up MIDI
keyboard (Monitoring). If you start recording now, a new MIDI object
will be created in the track, the MIDI Editor will open and the MIDI
recording (view page 86) will begin.
Zooming
The vertical zoom function sets the number of visible
tracks. On many tracks zooming is useful to be able to
selectively edit a track or an object in full view.
Use the horizontal zoom functions to set up the visible section of the arrangement on
the timeline.
Clicking and dragging on the bottom border of a track allows you to adjust the height
of the display.
Move/Zoom with the scroll bar
If you move the mouse to the edge of the scroll bar, the cursor will turn into a double-
arrow symbol which can be used to select and compress/stretch the scroll bar. This
way, you can zoom in and out quickly. Dragging the middle of the scroll bar moves the
visible section.
You can tell which part of the entire arrangement is being played by the size and
position of the scroll bar. If the whole arrangement is displayed, then the scroll bar will
fill out the bar. Complete view may be set by doublke clicking the scroll bar.
A track may not be diminished without any limit, and the number of maximum
displayable tracks is also limited, meaning not all tracks may be able to be viewed at
once.
Zoom buttons

Zoom menu: Certain zoom levels may be selected by right clicking the
horizontal scroll bar or by clicking the zoom menu. You can also jump to
certain positions in the arrangement here.

Enlarge objects: Vertical and horizontal zoom stages are enlarged so that
all of the selected objects are displayed at maximum size. If the function is
switched off, the regular zoom stage will be restored.

Arranger 33


Optimize view (view page 223)

Zoom buttons: Buttons for zooming in and out

Move/Zoom with the mouse wheel
The visible section can be moved, reduced, and increased in size by using the mouse
wheel.
Moving a visible section Mouse wheel
Enlarge or reduce the visible section (Zoom) Ctrl + Mouse wheel
Displayed tracks Shift + Mouse wheel
Number of displayed tracks, increase/decrease track
height
Ctrl + Shift + Mouse
wheel

Grid
Timestretching in the arrangement is displayed by the vertical progress of the tracks.
To structure this progression, a timeline displaying time units has been positioned at
the top of the first track.
Two consecutive objects will seamlessly snap together even if they are on different
tracks. This avoids undesired gaps or overlaps.
The bar grid makes sure that the objects and the start, end & play markers only snap
into place at specific positions so that they can be positioned precisely according to
the beat.

The grid width can be set using the button to the top left.
If, for example, "1/2 beat" has been set, then the objects and markers snap into
position at all half beat positions when moved. This way there won't be any gaps
between the objects and precisely beat-matched cuts are possible. The selection
ranges from full beats to 1/16 grid sizes. Triplet values are also possible.
The "Frame" setting allows fine positioning using the time code. The time display in
the timeline and transport control automatically changes from bars:beats:ticks to
hours:minutes:seconds:frames.
"Objects" deactivates the beat grid and the grid will now only affect the object edges.
You can also deactivate the grind entirely by selecting "No grid" or by pressing "Ctrl +
F12".
"Select beat type" switches the timeline to irregular bars like ¾ beat.

34
www.magix.com
Playback area, Start and end markers
In the upper area of the timeline, there are two markers between which playback area
is displayed, and this area can be played back as a loop (endless).

The length of the playback area is shown in blue. The number before the point
indicates the number of bars, the number following it indicates the number of
fragments corresponding to the selected grid, e.g. 3.3 on a 1/16 grid = 3 bars and
3/16. A tilde (~) in the display means that the playback area doesn’t have the exact
raster length and the loop is therefore "non-circular". Double clicking on the playback
area sets it to cover the whole arrangement; double clicking again sets it between the
start of the arrangement and the last object.
This area also determines which positions are copied or inserted into the clipboard’s
memory by the the edit menu commands "Edit range" or the keyboard shortcuts "Ctrl
+ Alt + C" for "copy", "Ctrl + Alt + V" for "paste" or "Ctrl + Alt + X" for "cut".
The right end marker is always moved together with the start marker so that the
length of the looped playback area remains constant as the start marker is moved. So
always move the start marker first and then the end marker.
The start and end markers can be moved in different ways with the mouse. You can
move them to any position via drag & drop or directly with a mouse click: a left mouse
click in the timeline moves the start marker; right clicking moves the end marker.
It’s even easier with the keyboard: The cursor keys move the playback area forward or
backward by a whole playback area’s length. Press "Ctrl" as well to move the playback
area by a quarter of its length. "Shift" + cursor keys halves or doubles the playback
area’s length.
"Ctrl + Shift" +cursor keys enables you to lengthen or shorten the playback area by a
bar. Use this function as well to quickly move the playback area onto a smooth bar
length.
When you move the playback area while a playback is running, the old area is always
played to the end and smoothly changed into the new one after. In this way you can
remix your tracks in real-time with the keyboard!
Note: If the starting marker does not move to the right with a left click or via the
keyboard, it is because the end marker would then have to be shifted beyond the
end of the arrangement. In this case, move the start marker via drag & drop or
position the end marker!

Arranger 35

Move playback marker
The playback marker can be moved independent of the start marker. Just click on the
lower portion of the timeline Once the playback marker reaches the end marker
playback will recommence at the position of the start marker. If the playback marker
has been set to the right outside of the area, the arrangement will be played to the
end. The stretched out playback range will then be played as a loop.
Transport Bar (playback functions)
The transport bar's functions enable you to control the playback behavior of the
arrangement using the mouse.

Tip: Using the space bar on your computer's keyboard you can start and stop
playback much more easily. An overview of all keyboard shortcuts is available at the
back of the manual.

Playing an endless loop (looped object) can be deactivated here.
Playback will always stop when the end marker is reached.

Back to start: With this button the start marker is quickly moved to the
beginning of the arrangement. Another click on "Back to start" moves
the start marker and the playback range to the beginning of the
arrangement.

Stop: This button ends playback. The playback marker returns to the
position from which it started.

Play/Pause: This button starts continuous playback of the
arrangement. If the playback marker reaches the end marker, the range
between the start and end marker will be played back as a loop.
Another click on Play stops it at the current position of the playback
marker (Pause).

Record: Depending on the settings in the track header (view page 31)
an audio (view page 60) or MIDI recording (view page 86) will be
started.


36
www.magix.com
Volume control

The volume control is to the left of the transport controller. With it, you can quickly
control the overall volume of your arrangement. To regulate the volume of individual
tracks, use the mixer (view page 179).
Clicking on the speaker icon mutes the entire sound output.
Under the volume control there is a peak meter that displays the master signal peak
level and an indicator for incoming MIDI signals.
Time display

The time display is beside the transport console. This is where the current playback
position is displayed. With the position slider you can quickly move the playback
marker within visible range. By right-clicking it is also possible to switch the time
display to show the remaining time (relative to the end of the project) or to choose
various units of measurement, e.g. hh:mm:ss or frames.
Metronome

If this icon is active, then a metronome (click) will play during playback and recording.
This provides helps you orient yourself with the arrangement tempo while you make
your own recordings.
Tempo

Here, the song's beat is displayed in BPM (Beats per minute). The arrangement
tempo is set automatically by the first sample used in the arrangement. To enter a
new tempo, click on the number and enter a BPM value in the field. Finalize the entry
by pressing the Enter key. The objects in the arrangement are adapted using
timestretching.
Click on BPM to open the Tap Tempo Dialog where you can set the tempo by
"tapping" it out. Simply click the tap button at your desired tempo or press the T key.
The tempo is measured and displayed in the dialog. Pressing OK accepts the tempo.

Arranger 37

Arranger buttons
The Arranger buttons for quickly opening and closing all the most important windows
can be found underneath the last track in the Arranger.
Opens the mixer (view page 179) where tracks can be mixed by adjusting
volume, setting the position in the stereo panorama and adding effects.
Opens or closes the video monitor (view page 174). The video monitor
displays the video and images files that have been loaded into Music Maker. It
can also be used as a peak meter, overview of the arrangement or as an info
box for help text.

38
www.magix.com
Media Pool
The Media Pool in MAGIX Music Maker 2013 lets you access, preview and load all
supported media types online and offline, e.g. the included audio and MIDI loops,
audio CDs, MP3s, software instruments or effects.
All media types are loaded into an arrangement from local drives or directly from the
Internet by double-clicking or dragging & dropping.
The upper edge of the Media Pool contains seven buttons which operate the Media
Pool in different ways:
• The setting Soundpools offers a database view of all Soundpools.
• The File manager is very similar to Windows Explorer. It controls and loads media
files of all types from the hard drive.
• The Instruments (view page 102) setting displays a list of the available software
instruments.
• Under Templates (view page 44) you can find the presets for all types of audio,
video and title effects.
• The Keyboard enables software synthesizers to be played and recorded directly
via the on-screen keyboard.
• The object Inspector offers quick access to properties of objects, e.g. audio
effects for audio objects. For MIDI objects (view page 80), a smaller version of
the MIDI Editor is shown, which allows you to edit the selected object.
• Catooh connects directly to Catooh (view page 202).
Preview function
There is a preview function for all files: By simply clicking an audio object, the pre-
listening function starts via the sound card. Video, graphics and text objects are
shown on the video screen.
As the arrangement plays on, you can experiment with sounds from the Media Pool
(see Smart Preview (view page 57)).
Note: Even while previewing, audio files are adapted to the current tempo using
timestretching (you can deactivate this in the "Audio/Video options" menu).

Media Pool 39

Soundpool settings
This setting can be used to access the Soundpools. You can access the included
Soundpools through the clearly laid out database view that lets you arrange the
display of the loops according to styles, instruments and pitch.
During installation, if you no longer have the Soundpools on your hard disk, insert the
MAGIX Music Maker 2013 installation DVD into the drive. The contents of the
Soundpool media will now be imported into the database. Other Soundpool media are
automatically recognized and added to the media database.
Note: Under program settings -> General (view page 204), you will find different
options for maintaining and displaying the Soundpool database.

Soundpools already present on the hard disk can be imported into the
database by clicking "Add styles".
Soundpools from previous versions of Music Maker or additional Soundpool
collections that you have purchased can also be integrated into the Media Pool this
way.
A Soundpool consists of one or more styles. Styles are sound libraries that belong
together and cover a certain musical style. The sounds (sample or MIDI loops) of one
style all have a certain tempo. You can mix loops from different styles, and the
tempos will be adjusted accordingly. Within a style, loops are ordered according to
instruments, and one instrument folder contains different sounds. Each sound can
have a different pitch (except for drums and effects sounds).

All of the styles that are available in the database are displayed in the first column.
The second column lists the instruments.
The list of samples found is created after entry selection in the first two columns.
With "Ctrl + click" you can reduce or expand a selection. No selection ("Ctrl + click"
on a single selected element) or clicking on "Select all" shows all entries from this
category. If you select an instrument (e.g. "Drums" and "Percussion") and no style, all
drums and percussion samples in the whole database will be displayed.
Simply clicking on the loop starts the preview. Clicking on the numbers 1 to 7 changes
the pitch. The pitch for that loop is set when you click on a different loop.

40
www.magix.com
You can sort the list according to criteria (Type, Name, BPM, Length in bars, Favorite,
Style) by clicking on the column header.
The list can also be filtered:

Clicking on the star in the sample list marks the
loop as a favorite. You can use the filter
"Favorites" to display only the loops that you have
marked as favorites.
You can display only audio loops, MIDI
loops or both. For the difference between
audio and MIDI loops see below.
An entry field for full text search is located above the match list.
In the search field, you can search the list of the samples
found according to a certain sound file name.


Sound Vision view: This button displays all Soundpools as
galaxies.

Audio Loops and MIDI Loops
In Music Maker a distinction is made between audio and MIDI loops. Audio loops are
normal audio files that have a specific number of bars (1, 2, or 4) and can be played
back as loops. MIDI loops consist of a MIDI Take (view page 54) that contains the
notes (MIDI file) and the sound settings for a particular software instrument. Both
types of loop have advantages and disadvantages:

Icon Advantages Disadvantages
Audio

• Recordings made on
professional studio equipment
with top quality instruments
and expensive synthesizers.
• They require less computer
power than sounds reproduced
in realtime.
• If the original tempo of the loop
is changed with timestretching
the sound quality can be
negatively affected.
• The melody and rhythm are
already set in the recording and
can only be adjusted with
complicated pitchshifting.
MIDI

• Pitch and tempo changes don't
require additional computer
power and don't affect the
sound quality.
• You can use the MIDI Editor to
change the melody of the loop
any way you want.
• Software instruments process
the sound in realtime and
therefore require more
computer power.
• Even the most high-quality
samples don't sound quite as
natural as real instruments.


Media Pool 41

SoundVision

This alternative display of the Soundpool library shows all available sounds
graphically. No matter how large the Soundpool collection is, you can view the entire
library using this 2-dimensional display. This "galaxy" can now be accessed via the
mouse to collect all of the sounds you want.
The large clusters of "stars" are the styles, and these are arranged from inside to
outside with increasing tempo. Eventually they form a center - the styles furthest out
have the highest tempo.
Within a style are the individual instruments (e.g. keys, pads, sequence) formed in a
circle, and the drums are in the middle. Every instrument group has a certain color
assigned to it which is the same in every style. The individual sounds are points
encircled by the individual pitches, if available.
You navigate throughout the Sound Vision view by moving the selection displayed
with the mouse; the mouse wheel enlarges or diminishes the view. The points (which
symbolize the sound loops) can be manipulated exactly as in the Media Pool list view,
i.e. select by double clicking and load by double clicking or via drag & drop.
File manager settings
MAGIX Music Maker 2013's file manager works very similarly to Windows Explorer.
It can be used to access and load media files of all kinds, e.g. videos, bitmaps, MP3
audio files, audio CD tracks, RTF text files for titles.
The Media Pool consists of a file list to the right (the actual “Media Pool”), in which all
loadable media types (and, if required, further subfolders) are listed, and the
navigation area on the left-hand side.
In the file list, all supported multimedia files and subdirectories of the currently
chosen directory are displayed. All entries can be loaded into the arranger tracks by
double clicking or via drag & drop.
In the navigation area, you can find different buttons for directly accessing preset
subfolders.
You can right click in the file list to define further buttons ("links"). Switch to the
folder which you would like to create a link to and select the option "Link to folder"
from the context menu.

42
www.magix.com
Navigation buttons
Forwards/Back

The "Back" button always returns you to the
folder where you were previously.
Up

The "Up" button brings you to the next highest
folder level.
View

These buttons switch the file view list between
icons, lists, or details.

Various file list view modes
The file list displays all supported multimedia files and subfolders of the currently
selected folder. Three different views (list, detail, large symbols) can be set by right
clicking on the options or Media Pool's context menu.

List: Only file names are listed.
This view mode displays the
most files simultaneously.

Details: The details section
displays the type, size, and date
of modification for every media
file beside the name. The list can
be sorted by clicking on any of
these details.

Large symbols: These can be
quite useful, since they show a
preview frame for each movie
and picture file. This allows you
to sort through the material
quicker. The disadvantage is that
it takes longer for the file list to
be displayed.

Deleting, copying, and moving files
All files listed in the media window can be selected, deleted, or moved into other
folders via drag & drop, just like via Windows Explorer. This way, all objects desired
for placement in an arrangement can be collected in a separate folder beforehand.
Additional functions can be accessed via the context menu, i.e. by right clicking an
entry.

Media Pool 43

My Projects
This button opens the "My Projects" folder. This is a subfolder of "My Projects" that is
named after the program (i.e. MAGIX Music Maker 2013, only featuring "_" instead of
empty spaces). This is created automatically when the program is installed. All new
recordings and arrangements are saved here automatically as a preset, and finished
arrangements are exported here. You may change the save location as you see fit via
Program settings > Folders (view page 204, view page 203).
My Files: This displays the contents of the "My Files" folder. This is normally the save
location of videos, pictures, music, etc. (in the corresponding subfolders).
My MP3s
This provides quick access to your own MP3 collection. When this button is pressed
for the first time, you can select the folder where your MP3 files are saved. You may
also change this path later via "Program settings", the "Folder" tab (Y key or "File"
menu > "Settings" > "Program settings").
Database

This button displays the media files on your computer in a well-
structured database view.
This means the files are no longer displayed according to where they are stored in the
different folders but are grouped according to general characteristics. The top "folder
level" is the difference in audio, video or image files; subfolders would be, for instance,
the date for photos or the artist for MP3 files.
In order to present media data on your PC in a database view, you first have to add
them to the MAGIX database. To do this, click on the database button to the right and
select the option Start media manager for photos and music.
This opens the corresponding MAGIX program and the database scan function of the
program.
MAGIX Music Maker 2013 comes with the free photo and music management
programs MAGIX Photo Manager and MAGIX Music Manager. If you have the
corresponding free versions, MAGIX MP3 Maker or MAGIX Digital Photo Maker,
they will be used instead.
By right clicking on "Database" and clicking on "Database search", you can open a
special search dialog in which you can carry out a targeted search for media.
Search the database
Quick search: Simply enter a keyword and highlight the data type (photo, audio,
video). All available Database columns are searched for the keyword.
Expert search: Here you can restrict your search by stating search criteria in the
following way:

44
www.magix.com
Database column Condition Comparison item
e.g. dimensions greater than 800
You can search up to three database columns that are connected via "and" or "or"
simultaneously.
"AND" means only those files will be listed that match all criteria.
"OR" means only those files will be listed that match at least one of the criteria.
Instrument settings
This button opens the folder containing your software instruments. You can read
more on this in the Software Instruments (view page 102) chapter.
Template settings
This opens the folders for installed effects presets. Saved audio and video effects
presets as well as title templates also land in these folders, so that over time a
complete library of your own presets will develop.

The buttons to the left open the folders for audio effects ("Audio FX"), presets for the
Vintage Effects Suite ("Vintage FX"), presets for the Live Performer ("Live Pads"), the
LiViD drums synthesizer, title templates ("Titles"), video effects ("Video FX", "Video
Mix FX"), and animations ("Visuals").
You can also add effects via drag & drop. Simply drag these onto the corresponding
object using the mouse.
The context menu for audio objects enables you to to set audio effects in the effects
rack (view page 132) precisely!

Media Pool 45

Keyboard settings
The keyboard enables software synthesizers (view page 124) to be played and
recorded directly via the on-screen keyboard.

If a track synthesizer is not present, then a new track will be added and a new
synthesizer plug-in will be added when the view is switched to "Keyboard" (Vita with
Sound Acoustic Bar Piano).
The keyboard always controls the synthesizer in the track for which MIDI recording
has been activated.
You can click the keyboard with the mouse to play the instrument. The closer to the
bottom edge you click on the "virtual keys", the louder the sound will play. Of course,
you can't seriously play music by clicking with the mouse (this function is more
suitable for testing out sounds quickly). That's why you can also play the keyboard
with the keys on your computer's own keyboard.
Note: This works only after you first click once on the keyboard using your mouse.
Otherwise, pressing the computer keys will function as key shortcuts (view page
232) for the different features in Music Maker. If the computer keys control the
program's keyboard, then the piano keys feature the corresponding characters on
your keyboard.

A sound program for the synthesizer may be selected from
this list.
This button opens the editor window for the synthesizer for
fine tuning the sound.
Object Inspector settings
The Object Inspector offers quick access to properties of objects, e.g. audio effects for
audio objects. For MIDI objects (view page 80), a smaller version of the MIDI Editor
is shown, which allows you to edit the selected object.

46
www.magix.com
Audio Objects
If an audio object is selected the object inspector will open featuring the audio object
view

This displays the available object effects (view page 133) in a clearly laid out list. The
button at the front switches the effects on and off. Clicking on the effect name opens
the settings dialog.
MIDI objects
If a MIDI object is selected, then the Object Inspector shows a smaller version of the
MIDI Editor. The MIDI Editor in the Object Inspector operates in the same way as the
"bigger" version in its own window, but the menu and several playback and recording
settings are not available.


Media Pool 47

For more information, please read the section MIDI Editor in the chapter "MIDI
objects"!
Setting Catooh
You can preview multimedia files from the Online Content Library Catooh, load them
into the arrangement, and edit them further .
Please read the chapter entitled Catooh (view page 202)!

48
www.magix.com
Mouse modes
MAGIX Music Maker 2013 offers special mouse modes for arranging and editing
objects.

A small arrow next to the mouse pointer symbol allows different modes to be
set.
Move selection

This is the preset mouse mode in which most changes are made.
Left clicking selects an object. When the "Shift" or "Control" keys are pressed,
multiple objects can be selected. Hold down the mouse button to move selected
objects.
In this mode the objects can be faded in or out or their lengths can be changed using
any of the five handles. Please refer to the "Arranging objects" (view page 50)
chapter. Right clicking on an object opens the context menu with the most important
effects and settings available for that specific object.
If an effect curve is active in the deluxe version, the curve handles can be selected and
moved. Double clicking on the curve creates new handles.
Shortcut: Ctrl + 1, number key 1
Move to track

This mouse mode behaves basically like the mouse mode for individual objects,
but moving objects
results in all other objects behind the object moving in sync on the track. This is
practical if space is needed at the start of a track, since all objects can be moved
together without moving them underneath each other.
Shortcut: Ctrl + 2, number key 2
Move all

This mouse mode behaves in principal just like the "Single object mouse mode",
but during moving, all objects on all tracks will be moved together from the mouse
position.
Shortcut: Ctrl + 3, number key 3

Mouse modes 49

Draw

In this mode you can insert further similar objects behind an already loaded
object.
Starting from the first object, the following objects are always inserted synchronously
so that you can also think of this mode as the insertion of a "Mute" automation from a
continuous loop. You can read more about this in the section "Drawing in loops (view
page 54)" in the chapter "Arranging objects".
Shortcut: Ctrl + 5, number key 5
Split

You can split objects quickly with this mouse mode in order to remove
unwanted parts or attach various effects to parts
of objects.
Shortcut: Ctrl + 6, number key 6
Stretch

This special mode is for customizing the length of objects.
Objects can be on the lower handles stretched or compressed. Audio material is
therefore lengthened via timestretching without changing the pitch itself The middle
object handles allow the object's pitch to be changed using pitchshifting in the range
of -7... +7.
Shortcut: Ctrl + 7, number key 7
Preview audio

This mode allows you to preview audio objects (as long as the mouse button is
held down)
for the entire duration and independent of the start and end markers in the timeline.
Other object types are protected against unwanted moving.
Shortcut: Ctrl 8, number key 8
Scrubbing

By holding down the mouse button, the arrangement can be previewed at the
point where the cursor is positioned.

50
www.magix.com
The playback marker follows the mouse movements. This mode is especially suited to
searching for specific parts of an arrangement.
Shortcut: Ctrl + 9, number key 9
Replace

This mouse mode simplifies searching for suitable samples: Left mouse click on
a MAGIX
Soundpool object to switch the object automatically with another from the same
instrument category. Shift + left mouse click keeps the object but changes the pitch.
Ideal for quick experimentation!
Shortcut: Ctrl + 0, number key 0
Context help

This mouse mode allows you to open the corresponding "Help" section by
clicking on any area of the MAGIX Music Maker 2013 screen.

Shortcut: Alt + F1

Arranging Objects 51

Arranging Objects
In MAGIX Music Maker 2013 you can jointly and uniformly load, arrange, edit, and
export different multimedia file formats. This chapter describes the basic way of
working with multimedia objects. This includes audio objects, video objects, graphics,
midi objects, and synth objects. Later chapters will describe the particulars of the
respective formats.
All object editing is virtual, non-destructive, and is calculated in real time during play.
The multimedia material is thus not destroyed (non-destructive editing) and any
change can be cancelled with the multi-stage undo function ("Ctrl + Z"). You can
experiment to your heart’s content without having to fear that you will change or
damage the original material.
Loading and saving arrangements
"Arrangement" refers to the objects found in the arranger (Audio, Video, MIDI, songs,
graphics, synthesizers) along with all its positions, fades, length, volume, brightness
settings and effects.
Arrangements can be saved via the menu "File"as an MMM file and loaded again.
When loading arrangements you must ensure that all the used objects are available in
their respective folders. Often is it advisable to "Save Arrangement and Used Media"
from the menu "File" > "Backup". Then the entire arrangement with all objects and
effects are saved to a configurable folder on the hard disk and can be easily
downloaded from there.
Multimedia files and objects
All multimedia files supported by MAGIX Music Maker 2013 can be previewed or
listened to in the File Manager by clicking and dragging into the arranger via drag &
drop. The files are displayed as objects in the tracks after the mouse is released.
Using the "Tab" button, you can switch between two object display views.
In alternative display modes, the objects are not represented frame by frame, but
simplified. This is useful for quicker representations of video objects: RAM is saved
and the overall performance improved. Audio objects will be shown using one or two
(for stereo) waveform representations.
Right clicking on an object opens the context menu with the most important editing
options available for that specific object.

52
www.magix.com
Select objects
To edit or delete objects using the menus, you must first select them. To do so, simply
click on the object you wish to select. When the "Shift" key is pressed, multiple
objects are selected. Object modifications like cutting, moving, effects assignment
and so on, apply to all selected objects together.
The handles of selected objects light up to show that the accompanying object has
been selected and can be edited using the menu functions.
Several objects can be selected quickly by clicking on the first object in the first track
with the mouse and dragging out a square for selection. All objects entirely or partially
within the square will be selected (rubberband selection).
Mute objects
Each object can be muted individually. Simply select the objects you want to mute
and press Ctrl + M (or use the corresponding command from the context menu).
Build or split object groups
Several objects can be combined to make up a group, to avoid the objects being
unintentionally moved out of relation to each other.
Once they are combined, clicking on one object of a group will select the entire group.
To group or separate groups, use the buttons in the toolbar or the corresponding
commands in the "edit" menu.
Splitting objects
All objects can be split. Each object section that is created becomes a separate object.
To do this you can select the object you want to cut and move the playback marker to
the position where you want to cut. .

Click on this button in the upper toolbar (view page 232) or click on „Edit” and
select the option „Split objects” or press the „T” key. It's even easier with the
mouse mode "Split objects (view page 49)".
To rejoin these split objects at a later stage, simply highlight the individual parts and
select the command "group" to join the selected objects together into one group.

Arranging Objects 53

Duplicate objects
Objects can be duplicated very easily in order to create larger arrangements. First, the
objects that need to be duplicated must be selected.
Then select the command "Edit menu -> Duplicate objects"
A copy of the object appears right beside the original which can be moved to any
position with the mouse.
It’s even faster if you click on the object that has to be copied and hold down "Ctrl"
at the same time. An object is then created which can be dragged to the desired
position. Furthermore, object copies require virtually no additional memory!
Another way to duplicate is by using the copy/edit commands from the "Edit" menu.
Object handles

With the help of the object handles, fine positioning, volume and brightness settings,
fading in and fading out as well as loops can be carried out directly in the arranger.
All editing is carried out in real time and is already calculated during playing. The
multimedia material is not destroyed in the process (non-destructive editing); any
change can be cancelled with the multi-stage undo function ("Ctrl + Z").
Object fades
Use the handles on the top left and right to fade an object in or out. By fading objects
in and out onto different tracks, it is possible to produce crossfades between different
objects. The length of the crossfading can be directly regulated with the handles.
Shortening or looping objects
Objects are "cut" virtually by "compressing" them with the mouse. "Pulling" them to
the right will stretch them, which results in the object being played as a loop until the
play cursor reaches the end of the object representation. In this way it is possible to
very quickly create an entire drum track from one single drum loop or to create a long
video from a short video sequence.
Guide the mouse to one of the bottom corners of the object until the mouse pointer
turns into a stretch symbol. Now you can stretch or compress the object until it has
reached the desired length.

54
www.magix.com
Normally an object is always looped over the full length of the underlying data
material (audio or video file). To set a clip from a file as a loop, shorten the object at
the front and the back with the handles and choose the command "Edit menu ->
Insert user-defined loop". This function is very useful for setting your own recording
as a loop, as the silence at the beginning of a recording can be cut away.
Adjusting volume/brightness
With the volume/brightness handle in the top center of the object, you can change
the volume of audio and MIDI objects or adjust the brightness of video and bitmap
objects.
If several objects are played in parallel, it is possible to individually adjust the volume
or brightness ratios between objects in this manner.
The volume and brightness ratios between tracks are adjusted in the mixer.
"Draw in" loops
Audio loops can be drawn into the arranger tracks with the mouse.

For this you have to set the mouse mode to "Draw objects" by clicking on the
corresponding icon in the mouse modes menu. Now an audio sample has to
be loaded which will serve as a template and which will then be drawn into the
following area of the track as a loop in the track.
This works as follows:
1. Load any loop from the Media Pool into the arranger.
2. Click on an area further back on the same track and hold down the mouse button to
draw in the loop.
Starting from the first object, the drawn-in loop area is always synchronous with the
beat. This means that the drawn-in loop is not played from the beginning, but rather
starts from the position where the original loop would be if you had continued to this
position. Or, to put it differently, a running loop can be found on the track and you can
draw in at which position you can hear it ("Mute automation").
The synchronous start of the object in this mode has another consequence: If an
object is moved, then only object borders are moved, but the underlying loop,
however, always remains intact.
Takes
Every object can be saved as a "Take". Takes save all editing done on an object, like
object length, fade settings and all object effects. MIDI takes save the instrument
controlled by them (MIDI output or software instrument).

Arranging Objects 55

Takes are saved as "TAK" (*.tak) files and take up virtually no space on the hard disk.
This means you can cut a sample, add various effects to it and save it as various takes
in order to use these together with all their editing in other MAGIX Music Maker 2013
arrangements. Instead of repeatedly saving the original sample, only the object and
effect settings are saved. You can also save Synth objects (view page 124) as takes
which creates your own preset libraries for the synthesizer.

The MIDI loops included with MAGIX Music Maker 2013 (you'll recognize them
in the Media Pool by this icon) are also takes because the MIDI files (view page
80) only sound the way they were intended when combined with the right
synthesizer sound.
Attention When loading takes, the audio or video file for which the take was added
must be in the original folder.
Keyboard shortcut: Alt + Shift + S
Object properties
This function displays all the information about the currently selected objects, such as
file name, position on the hard disk, tempo, etc. The object editor also defines the
foreground and background color of every object in the arrangement.
In the "Tempo/Pitch" tab, information on the patched/determined tempo and pitch of
the audio object is shown. Furthermore, there is an overview of how the various
timestretching/pitchshifting operations affect the entire audio object. The
tempo/pitch adjustment when loading the sample, the effect of the master tempo
fader, and the time processor as object effect tracks are offset against one another,
but they may not mesh properly. For this reason, there are two buttons which can be
used to double/halve the object speed. Try using these buttons if the tempo of some
loops is incorrectly interpreted as twice or half the speed.
Mixdown audio
If the arranger becomes too full to manage, the system is out of RAM, or you just
want to ”summarize” your production, use the mix down function to convert the
entire audio arrangement into a single audio and/or video file.
To do so, choose the "Mixdown" function from the "Edit" menu. You can choose a
name and a destination for storing the mix down object. The default directory is ”My
Projects”. If only audio objects are in the tracks, a wave file will be created. If audio
and video objects are combined, you can choose whether an audio or a video file will
be created.
The objects of the arranger or the area will be replaced by the new object.

56
www.magix.com
MAGIX Music Maker 2013 automatically normalizes the audio file, i.e. the loudest
part of the wave audio object is identical with the highest figure of the 16-bit
resolution ceiling. This guarantees the same sound quality, even if you repeat the mix
down procedure or you combine the mix down file with other wave audio objects
again and again.
Tip:The mix down function is very helpful if you want to go on working with the mix-
down object. To create the finished end version of the song or video it is
recommended to select the "Export arrangement" function in the "File" menu
instead of the "Mixdown" function.
Shortcut: Ctrl + Shift + G

Audio Objects 57

Audio Objects
Audio formats
MAGIX Music Maker 2013 loads and edits audio files in the formats Wave (.wav),
OGG Vorbis (.ogg), Windows Media Audio (.wma), MPEG (.mpg), MP3 (.mp3) and
CDA (audio CD tracks). The stereo or mono data of a file are displayed as an object in
the arranger of the MAGIX Music Maker 2013. The material will be displayed as a
waveform, optically representing the sound to make editing easier.
Along with wave files, MP3 files, OGG Vorbis (.ogg), and ringtones can also be
exported.
In addition, the Premium version can load and export the Surround formats (after
activating the encoder) MP3 Surround, Surround WMA and wave (6-channel
interleaved).
Load and process audio files
All importable audio files can be accessed via the File Manager and previewed (audio)
by clicking the file name. Tracks from audio CDs can also be integrated by dragging &
dropping them into the arrangement.
Editing, fine positioning, volume adjustment, fading in and out, is all processed using
the "Object" tab directly in the arranger.
Please see the chapter "Arranging objects"
Smart preview for the included samples.
The included samples can be previewed while the arrangement is being played. They
are always played in time with the song. This means that if you combine loops from
different styles that have different tempos they will automatically be adjusted to the
current arrangement tempo even in the preview.
You can compose a song in realtime by loading different samples and searching for
suitable new building blocks during playback.
By simply clicking on the mouse or pressing the Enter key you can add the loop to the
arrangement or remove it by pressing the Del key.
Tip: You can also use key commands to quickly change the playback area (view
page 34) by using the arrow keys. This will let you add loops to your arrangement
with more precision.

58
www.magix.com
Audio recording
Your own sounds like vocals, speech, noises, or instruments can be easily recorded in
MAGIX Music Maker 2013 using the audio recording function.

Click the REC button in the track box to specify the track for the recording.

The display in the track box will change


Assuming you have everything connected properly (see below), the input signal will
be played back featuring all track effects (if there are any) (live monitoring (view page
182)).
Live monitoring requires the use of ASIO drivers (view page 206).

Click the red button on the transport bar to start the actual recording.
Connecting the source for recording
First of all, the source of the audio material must be connected to the sound card
input. Again, there are several possibilities which primarily depend on the type of
equipment you have.
If you are recording from a microphone, then please connect the microphone to the
microphone jack on your sound card (usually red).
If you want to record material from a stereo system, then you can use the line-out or
AUX out jacks on the back of your amplifier or tape deck. This involves connecting
them to the sound card input (usually red).
If your amplifier has no separate output (other than for the speakers), then you can
use the connection intended for headphones for your recordings. In most cases, you
will need a cable with two mini-stereo jacks. This type of connection has the
advantage of being able to set the headphone input signal level with a separate
volume. As headphone connections generally are not the best, it is advised that you
use the line outputs if possible.
When recording cassettes from a tape deck, you can connect the tape deck's line out
directly to the sound card input.
When recording from vinyl records, you should not connect the record player's output
directly with the sound card because the phono signal needs to be pre-amplified. A
more suitable method would be to use the headphone connection or an external pre-
amp.

Audio Objects 59

Adjusting the Signal Level
Adjusting the signal level to the sound card is also recommended to get the best
sound quality during digital recording.
Once a recording source is connected to the sound card, the "Record" button opens
the recording dialog and starts the recording source.
You can now adjust the recording level with the help of the LED display in the
recording dialog. For this, you must first check off "Show Levels".
If the adjustment is set too high, distortion occurs and the incoming signal must be
reduced. If you have connected the source through either an amplifier or tape deck
output to the sound card, you can only reduce the signal level in your sound card’s
software mixer interface. You can access the mixer directly from within the recording
dialog via the “Recording Level” button.
If you reduce input sensitivity by using the input fader, the resolution at which the
analog signal is digitized is also reduced. Try to set these automatic controllers to the
loudest sound level possible.
The maximum setting for an optimal level is the loudest part of the material. The
loudest part should be adjusted to be the maximum. The actual recording begins
when you press the "Record" button. At the end of the the recording you will be
asked if you want to use the recording. Upon confirmation, the newly-recorded
material will be placed at the next free position of the start maker in the arrangement.

60
www.magix.com
Audio recording dialog

Normalize after recording: This option raises your material to the correct volume
level after recording is completed. In order to achieve good audio results, you should
try to record the source as loud as possible without overmodulating it. The Peak
Meter display helps in the recording dialog.
Audio driver: This selects the sound card for recording.
Save audio file as/save in the following folder: This select the title of the audio file
you wish to record. You can also select the folder where you wish to store the file.
Recording quality: Sets the sound quality of the recording. The preset menu allows
you to choose between AM tuner, FM Radio, DAT (Digital Audio Tape), and CD
quality.
Display volume control (monitor): The peak meter allows you to monitor the level of
the incoming signal. Please read more on this in the section 'Adjusting levels (view
page 59)'.
Record: This button begins recording. The next free track will be used for recording
the audio material.
Stop: Click this button to stop recording

Audio Objects 61

Play during recording: If this option is active, then the arrangement will play back
during recording. This allows you to add recordings to the existing arrangement.
Advanced: Use this button to open a window containing a selection of three special
functions.
Advanced settings for audio recordings
• Mono recording: Activate to record in mono. This reduces the required memory
space in half. Mono recordings are recommended for voice recordings made
using only one standard mono microphone.
• Real-time resample to project's current sample rate: Automatically matches the
sample rate of a new file to be recorded with the sample rate of the current
movie's sound track (set in the video recording).
• Automatic volume reduction of other audio tracks ("ducking"): To add narration
or other sound material to a video that already has sound volume levels set,
activate the option ”Automatic reduction of sound volume of remaining audio
tracks”. This automatically reduces the volume of audio objects in the
arrangement during the recording session (”ducking”). This is achieved using an
automatically configured volume curve: Before and after the recording, other
tracks will be faded in or out, resulting in a homogeneous total volume level.
(Lowering of volume level during spoken comments is also called "Ducking".)
Import audio CD
Importing an audio CD works the same way as adding other audio files into the
arrangement:
• Insert an audio CD into the CD/DVD drive of the PC
• Go to your CD/DVD drive in the Media Pool (File Manager, Computer). The
individual CD titles appear in the file list.
• A simple mouse click starts the playback of the CD title for sampling purposes
• Drag & drop the track from the CD into a track of the current arrangement and it
will be digitally scanned and copied to the hard-drive. The files will be saved in
the import folder (may be specified under File > Settings > Program > Folders
(More information can be found in the section "Folders" on page 209)).
• The CD track appears in the track as an audio object and can be played back or
edited immediately.
CD Manager
This option opens the CD manager to select tracks from audio CDs and partially or
fully import them into the arrangement. You can also select and configure the used
drive if you have more than one drive.
The CD manager lets you import audio data using most CD and DVD drives. You may
have to contact your technical support to find out which drive is suitable. The data is

62
www.magix.com
imported digitally, thus eliminating loss in sound quality. Audio tracks are imported
into the arrangement as Wave files. The files are saved in the import folder ("File ->
Properties > Program settings -> System -> Path settings (More information can be
found in the section "Folders" on page 209)").
To import audio tracks via the CD manager you should proceed as follows:
1. Insert an audio CD into the drive and select "Import audio CD track(s)" from
the "File" menu. A dialog with a list of the CD tracks will open. If you have
more than one drive, you may have to first select the drive containing the CD.
You can do this in CD drive options.
2. Select the desired tracks (multiple selection by "Ctrl" + mouse-click).
3. Click on "Copy selected track(s)...".
4. The "Import project" dialog will now appear. Here you can enter the file name
and select the target directory.
5. The audio material is then copied from the drive onto the hard disk. A progress
bar is displayed.
6. Once copying is complete, the dialog will be closed and the tracks are inserted
into the arrangement as individual objects.
The track list dialog

On the left-hand side in the list you can choose which track(s)/title(s) you wish to
import from the CD. Several subsequent tracks can also be selected by holding "Shift"
and left-clicking; "Ctrl" + clicking selects several tracks; "Copy selected track(s)"
starts the audio copying process. A new object is created for every track in the
arrangement and the corresponding track marker is created.

Audio Objects 63


Transport control: This lets you start and stop
playback just like on a real CD player and skip
forward and backward in the playlist.
Use the small faders to control the preview volume. With the faders at the bottom
you can go to a specific position in a track. To import just one section of a CD track,
choose "Start selection" at the beginning of the section and "End selection" at the
end.
Below the transport control details on the total length and the memory capacity of the
selected track/section are displayed.
Select all tracks: All tracks are selected, for instance, to copy the entire CD.
In the right selection box you can select the read speed, and in the left one you can
select the export mode (see Configuring the CD-ROM).
CD drive options: Here you can change the settings and select the drive for grabbing
the CD if you have installed several CD drives (see also CD-ROM drive dialog).
"Import project" dialog: The "Import project" dialog appears after you have selected
the option "Copy selected tracks". Here you can specify name and target address of
the audio files. The audio files are subsequently numbered (name -> name_1.wav,
name_1.wav).
Copy-protected audio CDs
According to the copyright act, it is forbidden to copy a CD with copy protection.
However, an owner of a CD may create a backup copy for himself. The problem is,
however, that you cannot create a copy from copy-protected CDs because they
cannot be read using a conventional PC drive. In order to create a backup of such a
copy-protected CD, you have to play it on an audio CD player and record it as a
regular analog recording via the sound card.
CD/DVD drive list


64
www.magix.com
Configuration: This button opens the configuration dialog, where various special
settings can be made.
Reset: sets drive settings back to default.
Add: Creates a new drive in the list, which first requires special settings.
Delete: Deletes selected drive from the list.
Load setup: Loads the current drive list and all configuration data from a *.cfg file.
Save setup: Saves the current drive list and all configuration files in a *.cfg file.
CD/DVD-ROM configuration

Drive Name: Lets you edit the name of the drive in the list. This is useful if you create
more than one entry accessing the same physical drive.
Host Adapter Number: Lets you specify the number of your SCSI adapter - normally
0.
Bus ID: Here you can enter the ID of your CD-ROM drive. Be sure to set the correct
ID, there is no error checking!
Bus LUN: sets the LUN parameter, normally 0.
Alias: Lets you select the manufacturer type of your CD ROM drive.
Normal copy mode: copies audio files without any software correction.

Audio Objects 65

Copy mode sector synchronization: copies audio files with a special correction
algorithm. This is especially useful, since many CD drives have problems finding an
exact position again and gaps can occur.
Burst copy mode: optimizes the speed of the copy process, no software correction is
used.
Sectors per cycle: defines the audio sector count that should be read from the audio
CD in one cycle. The higher the number of sectors, the faster the copying process.
Numerous SCSI systems have problems with more than 27 sectors.
Sync sectors: sets the count of audio sectors, which should be used for software
correction. A higher number results in a better synchronization but also in a slower
copying process.
Recording Audio CDs
In some cases the CD can be copied during recording. The CD track is simply played
on the CD/DVD-ROM drive and recorded by the sound card. You should note that
the digital track data from the digital analog converters of the CD-ROM drive have to
be converted into analog signals and then into digital data by the analog/digital
converters. Depending on the quality of the converter used, this can lead to losses in
quality.
Before beginning this, the "Load tracks via record dialog" option under "File ->
Properties -> Program settings -> Audio" has to be activated. The audio output of the
CD-R drive must also be connected with the input of the sound card. This is already
the case with most multimedia PCs (if not, then it can be accomplished with a small
cable inside the computer).
When "Load CD tracks via record dialog" is active, song parts can also be added to
the arrangement without having to load the entire track.
Change the playback tempo or pitch
If you want to combine audio material you have recorded yourself from different
sources, samples from Soundpools, or songs from CD with each other, then you will
often need to adjust the tempo or pitch of audio objects to match each other. There's
an automatic function which automatically adjusts the tempo of audio objects when
they are loaded to the arrangement's tempo, plus advanced tools like the Remix
Agent and the Loop Finder (view page 220).
Automatic tempo adjustment when loading
In general, MAGIX Music Maker 2013 automatically adjusts audio files to the
arrangement tempo. In normal cases, you won't need to worry about the different
tempo of audio files and Soundpool samples, since these are automatically matched.
But since automatic processes can fail too, the following process explains when you
may need to "manually" adjust things.

66
www.magix.com
In the new arrangement (empty), the tempo will be determined by the first samples
loaded into it. All additional audio files will then be automatically adjusted to this
tempo. If you are planning a remix which is composed of different samples with
different tempo, then try to add the most important sample first. This minimizes
sound distortions compared to the other samples via timestretching.
In order to be able to correctly adjust an audio object to the tempo, its output tempo
must first be detected. If the sound is a Soundpool sample, then the tempo saved
therein ("patched") will be used, and the tempo adjustment will always work.
For all other (short) samples, an attempt will be made to automatically provide the
tempo. If the sample is not cut exactly, i.e. it does not contain an exact number of
beats or is incorrectly interpreted by the automatic detection process, then this may
not work. The sample will then be incorrectly stretched or an incorrect arrangement
tempo will be set.
In this case, use the Loop Finder to specify the tempo semi-automatically (more
about this under the chapter "Menu effects -> Audio -> Loop Finder (view page
220)"). This allows the sample to be cut to an even loop and the arrangement will
adjust to the detected tempo or vice versa.
The Remix Agent launches optionally for longer samples ( >15 seconds), e.g. entire
songs from CD or MP3s. This also gives you the option of either adjusting the sample
to match the arrangement or the arrangement to the sample.
MIDI objects for controlling synth objects always have the correct tempo because
they are always aligned with the arrangement tempo.
In the dialog "Program settings (view page 205) -> Import" ("Y" key), you can
deactivate the automatic tempo adjustment or limit it to patched samples.
Change tempo or pitch of individual objects manually
"Resampling", "timestretching", and "pitchshifting" provide high-quality effects for
you to change the pitch and tempo of selected audio objects dependent on or
independent from each other. You can access these tools via the "Effects" menu or
the object FX effects tracks.
These functions can be used for all audio files, i.e. for the included samples as well as
your own recordings, CD tracks, CD tracks, or sounds from the Internet.
The playback tempo can be quickly changed via "Timestrech" mouse mode, i.e. by
compressing/stretching the audio object's lower handles, in which case the tempo
will change but the pitch will not be influenced (compare with chapter "Mouse
mode"). The middle handles can also be used to change the pitch.
Detailed access can be accessed via the time processor effect (see chapter "Audio
effects -> Timestretch/Resample"). This allows you to specify different timestretch

Audio Objects 67

algorithms for the corresponding object, since the best results often depend on the
respective audio material and the different algorithms.
The tempo setting on the transport controller allow the arrangement's tempo to be
changed retroactively. This affects all objects contained in the arrangement, and in
some circumstances this can lead to an increased demand on the system and
dropping out during playback. If this occurs, use Apply function in the effects rack
(view page 137) or the Combine audio (view page 214) function.
Song Maker
With the help of the Song Maker, you can automatically arrange multiple audio
objects (loops) using included samples for songs or song parts without having to drag
them individually from the Media Pool into the corresponding tracks. Considering the
relatively random selection of loops that are combined you shouldn't expect the Song
Maker to produce a chart-topping hit, but it can be very helpful as a basis for making
your own adjustments and additions to create a cool arrangement.
Activate the Song Maker by pressing the “Song Maker” button or from the Effects
menu.


Select a music style.

Select the instruments that you want to use. If, for example, you only want a
rhythm section with drums and bass, deactivate the other instruments with a
mouse-click.

Select the song part or parts that you want to create. The parts differ in their
harmonic structure and instrument density, for example verses have fewer
instruments than refrains, while there are accompaniment variations between
the 1st and 2nd verses as well as in the refrains. The pitch sequence from verse
to verse remains the same. If you activate all parts, Song Maker creates a
complete song in the typical structure of a classic pop song, i.e. intro-verse-
chorus-verse-chorus-bridge-(transition or solo)-chorus-outro.

Use the sliders to the right to set the speed and the length of your song.

68
www.magix.com

"Chaos" draws a different loop of the corresponding instrument for each new
object. Normally, the same loop is continuously used in various pitches for each
element of the song such as verse, chorus etc. If you use "Automatic", a new
song in a randomly generated style will be created automatically, as soon as a
song has been played.

Now click on "Create Song". Song Maker automatically compiles an
arrangement. The following is only a suggestion.

Use the play button to preview the song maker's suggestion. If you don't like the
results, you can repeat the process. Before you do this, right-click on the
instruments you want to keep in the arrangement to prevent them from being
overwritten. You can return to a previous status anytime by clicking on "Undo"
or "Redo".

Once you're happy with Song Maker's suggestion, click on "Apply". The building
blocks are only now added to the arranger. A click on “Cancel” closes Song
Maker and returns to the original arrangement status.
Tip: If you start the Song Maker for an arrangement that already has audio material
in it, this material will not be affected. This means you can apply the Song Maker
repeatedly saving only the parts you like until you have a final arrangement. You can
also create song parts one after the other. The results from the Song Maker are
always added at the start marker position. If you decide you want to replace the
chorus you can simply set the start marker (view page 34) at that position.
Keyboard shortcut: W

Audio Objects 69

Remix agent - Tempo and beat assignment

The Remix Agent is a powerful tool that determines the tempo (measured in beats
per minute, or BPM) as well as the timing of the beats for a song’s quarter notes. This
is important if an audio CD title is imported into MAGIX Music Maker 2013, and you
want to mix in sounds like drum loops, effects, or synthesizer voices.
When to use the Auto Remix Assistant:
• When the tempo of the arrangement must be adapted to the tempo of the song.
• When the tempo of the song must be adapted to the tempo of an existing
arrangement.

70
www.magix.com
• When the song is to be cut up precisely to create a remix object which can then
be rearranged as desired.
Requirements for using the Remix Agent
• The song must be longer than 15 seconds.
• The song must be “rhythmic” (danceable).
• The song must be in stereo format.
Note: For analysis, it is presumed that the song is recorded in 4/4 time. If one of the
above requirements is not fulfilled, the Loop Finder can be used.
If songs longer than 15 seconds are dragged into the arrangement, the Remix Agent is
started automatically. When loading short samples (< 15 sec) the tempo is specified
automatically and some loops are similarly automatically customized to the tempo of
the arrangement. This also applies to previewing in the Media Pool (Smart Preview).
This method can be deactivated individually in the audio/video options ("A" key). You
can find out more in the "File -> Properties -> Program settings" section.
Preparation - Setting the start marker and object end
Before opening the Auto Remix Assistant, you should set the start marker at the
position in the song object in the arranger where you want detection to start. If the
song contains a long intro without beats, set the start marker after the intro. As a rule
of thumb, the Auto Remix Assistant should always be "fed" dance music.
• The start marker should be set before a quarter note beat or, better still, briefly
before a beat at the start of a bar.
• If the start marker lies before the song object, the object is examined from the
beginning.
• If detection is not performed by the end of the song, the object can be shortened
accordingly with the object handle at the end of the object.
Checking the automatic tempo recognition
The song has to meet the following three requirements to be successfully analyzed:
• It must be longer than 15 seconds.
• It must contain "rhythmic" (danceable) music.
• It must be in stereo format.
The analysis takes place in three steps:
Step 1: Checking the start marker
Step 2: Tempo recognition
Step 3: Specifying beat starts
Step 4: Application of BPM and beat recognition

Audio Objects 71

Step 1: Start marker check
Before analysis can begin, you should set the start marker in the project at the
position where rhythmic material begins. This means, it should be located after the
intro. If the assistant can't find any rhythmic information, it will ask if the marker is
located behind the intro. In the dialog, you can move it to the appropriate location.
If the beginning of the track has no rhythmic information, you will be asked if the start
marker should be moved.
Step 2: Checking automatic tempo recognition
The Remix Agent will begin the audio file analysis and try to determine the tempo.
The object will be played back while a metronome click will sound and numbered beat
lines will appear in the waveform display.
Below the waveform display to the left is an indicator of the found tempo in BPM. A
small transport control is available in the middle to make navigation easier. The slider
enables position control. To control the metronome volume, an additional slider as
well as a mute button is found to the right.
Automatic tempo recognition doesn't always work on the first try. If you don't hear
the metronome clicking in time with the music, click the "No" button in the upper
section of the dialog in order to access the manual tempo input dialog.
To correct metronome tempo and move metronome clicks if needed, use the tempo
correction and "Tap tempo" buttons.
Tempo correction: The Remix Agent offers you a number of tempos. The tempo,
which the Remix Agent considers most likely to be the case is already preset. If the
calculated tempo is incorrect, select one that better fits from the list. When the object
is played again, metronome clicks should be synchronized.
On/off beat correction: It can also be the case that the tempo is correct, but the
beats are shifted. "On/off beat correction" provides a number of alternatives for
moving the beats according to the complexity of the rhythm. Try out different
alternatives until you can hear that the metronome clicks are synchronous to the beat.
Tap tempo: Alternatively to tempo selection under "Tempo correction" you can also
click on the "Tap tempo" button or the "T" key to the beat of the music. Additional
blue lines are displayed in the wave display. After at least four taps, the Remix Agent
attempts to select the correct tempo from the list in "Tempo correction". The display
next to the "Tap tempo" button displays the current status. Keep tapping until the red
display showing "Unlocked" changes to the green "Locked" setting.
Use the "0" key to manually set the quarter beats while the music plays. Placed
markers will be removed automatically in such a way that the set tempo will be
maintained.

72
www.magix.com
You can move the markers with the mouse. If you press the "Ctrl" key at the same
time, all following markers will be moved.
If the metronome clicks now correspond with the music, you can continue to the next
step.
Step 3: Determining the start of a bar:
First set the type of beat. 4/4 beat is the default preset. If needed, correct the start of
the beat. The beat at the start of the beat should always match with the high-pitched
metronome click or the red line in the waveform display.
Correction cat take place in just one step: If you can hear the start of the beat, click
once with the mouse on the"Tap one" or press the "T" key on the keyboard.
Alternatively, select how many quarter notes the "One" is to be moved back.
Use the "0" key to manually tap the position of the beginnings of the bars during
playback. This offers an efficient option to correct the beat start of longer ranges.
Continue to the last step if the starts of the bars are now correct.
Step 4: Apply
The last step applies the musical information into the audio material.
Video cuts will now be inserted into the video material on track 1 based on this
information
Setting the manual and Onbeat/Offbeat
If the result is incorrect, you can help the Auto Remix Assistant with a few mouse
clicks on the correction buttons.
There are two possibilities:
On the one hand, the "Tempo correction" list offers alternative BPM numbers which
could also fit with the music. The adjustable BPM values are detected automatically –
the total BPM can therefore deviate from song to song.
For more difficult audio material, we recommend using the "Tapping input" mode.
Either the "T" key must be pressed or the "Tap tempo" button must be clicked with
the mouse in time with the music. With repeated tapping of the tempo correction
button, one should keep an eye on the color in the BPM display. In the "unlocked"
condition (red), the tapping is not in time with the music. One should tap until the
"locked" condition is displayed. After a short time, you will hear if the result is correct
via the metronome.
Subsequently, offbeat correction takes place as required. If the detected quarter note
beats lie around the length of an eighth note (transferred behind the real positions of

Audio Objects 73

the quarter note beats), one or more alternatives can be selected from the
onbeat/offbeat correction list.
Determining the start of a measure
Next, the starting point of the measure is corrected. The beat at the start of the
measure must always agree with the high tone of the metronome and/or the red line
in the wave-shaped display.
Corrections can be made by tapping; If the start of the measure can be be heard, tap
with the mouse or press the "T" key. Alternatively, you can also select how many
quarter notes the "one" is to be pushed to back.
If the starting marker was set briefly before the first beat of a measure, this correction
is not necessary.
Note: With all corrections, the metronome and visualization react to the lines in the
wave-shaped display only after a short delay.
Using BPM and beat detection
Now you may select one of the actions to be adapted to the arrangement song (or
vice versa) or cut up the songs at the ends of a measure.
Save only Tempo & Beat information
Only wave file data is stored. This makes sense if some manual post-correction is
required for determining beat/tempo.
When the data is stored, tempo & beat regulation can be released for future tempo
adjustments or to create object remixes.
Tempo adjustment
Setting the object tempo to the arrangement tempo
This fits the object length to the existing arrangement. Three different procedures are
possible: timestretching, resampling, or audio quantization.
• Timestretching keeps the pitch of the song constant, but sometimes the sound
quality can suffer.
• Resampling changes the pitch (similar to changing the speed of a record player),
and retains the sound quality of the song as much as is possible.
• During audio quantization, the audio file takes the tempo adjustments into
consideration as if the first remix object (see below) were created and combined
immediately into a new audio file. If the recognition is uncertain, extreme tempo
fluctuation may result. It is particularly important to set the starting marker so
that the tempo is recognized definitely. The advantage of audio quantization is
that small tempo fluctuations in the music balance out. The start of the measure

74
www.magix.com
always agrees with the start of the arrangement measure and never plays out of
time.
Setting the arrangement tempo to the object tempo
The arrangement adopts the detected BPM value. If you would like to use the cut-up
song as the basis for a new composition (e.g. for remixes), then this option should be
active.
Creating remix objects
The song is cut by beat into individual objects. Some applications may include:
• To produce loops from complete songs which can then be used with other
material. Most importantly, not all remix objects are suitable as loops. Ideally,
less complex material should be used, e.g. drums from an intro.
• To remix songs, thus changing the sequence of the objects, cutting or doubling
beats or to enrich the song with other loops or synth objects.
• To mix two songs: If percussion and tempo fit perfectly, can you blend the songs
without "side effects"?
This option can be activated later from the "Object" menu, provided that the tempo
data is stored.
The "Audio quantization" option: Audio quantization fits new objects exactly in time
with the arrangement.
With homemade music, tempo fluctuations are common, and therefore different
measure lengths may result. Nevertheless, so that the objects fit into the rigid timing
pattern of the VIPs, the time processor is activated automatically and object
timestretching is used to correct the different lengths.
Setting resampling for small corrections: If the necessary corrections are very small,
better quality resampling can be used instead of timestretching. Afterwards, you
should not change the master tempo any longer, since definite pitch changes may
arise.
Remix objects in "Loop" mode: New objects are set in "Loop" mode. When extending
the object with the right object mouse handle, the original length of the object is
played again and again.
Setting the arrangement tempo to the object tempo: (see above)
Note: Time correction assigned to objects can be subsequently cancelled if the time
processor is called up and edited ("Timestretch/Resample object", or double click
on the object to open the FX racks associated with the time processor).
Cancel: The dialog is closed.

Audio Objects 75

Problems and Remedies regarding the Auto Remix Assistant
Problem: The playback stutters, the metronome is suspended, the computer is
overloaded... (on older computers.)
Remedy: We recommend changing to wave drivers ("P" key, "Playback parameter"
dialog) instead of DirectSound.
Problem: The metronome does not work and there are no lines on the the wave-
shaped display.
Probable cause: The material does not contain beats or the song contains a passage
without beats.
Remedy: The song should be limited in such a way that only rhythmic passages are
contained.
Possible 2nd reason: Inaccurate tapping or a false BPM value has been entered.
Remedy: Try the tempo correction buttons or tap until the "locked" condition is
attained.
Problem: The metronome sounds inaccurately or is jerky, the lines in the wave-
shaped display are irregular and thinly drawn.
Remix Maker

The Remix Maker is connected directly to the Remix Agent.
Use it to automatically generate remixes. The loop objects sliced by the Remix Agent
are regrouped according to defined criteria. Simply choose one of the four "virtual
DJs", each of which represents a different remix style, and set the remix length and
structure.
Opening the Remix Maker
1. New song
• Load the new song you want to remix. This should contain clearly defined
rhythms.
• When the song is loaded, the Remix Agent pops up to give you the option of
dividing the song into its structural segments (see "Remix Agent" above).

76
www.magix.com
• Select the option "Open Remix Maker" from the Remix Agent dialog box.
• Once the Remix Agent has sliced your song, the Remix Maker is started
automatically.
2. Existing, edited song (in the arranger)
• Load a song arrangement that is made up of loop objects.
• Select one of the loop objects.
• Select "Remix Maker" from the shortcut menu (right mouse click).
3. Long, unedited audio object (in the arranger)
• Load an arrangement containing a long, unedited audio object.
• Select "Remix Maker" from the shortcut menu (right mouse click).
• You are then given the option of generating remix objects.
Presets
Choose one of four virtual DJs with different remix characteristics. We recommend
you try them all out and see which results you like best!
Remix length
Very short: around 20 seconds
Short: half the length of the original song
Normal: regular length of the original song
Double: twice the length of the original song
Shuffle mode
This determines the selection and order of the objects.
Do not change: The order of the objects are not changed.
Change slightly: A "pattern" (sequence of objects) is either repeated or the next
pattern inserted.
Distant: Objects that are far apart in the original song are placed close to each other.
Random: The objects are ordered randomly.
Fill mode
A "fill" or "fill-in" is created when the loop object sliced by the Remix Agent again to
produce very short objects that are looped or played in rapid succession. Fills are used
to liven up the regular beat.

Audio Objects 77

None: No fills are included.
Use slightly: A few simple fills are included.
Strong accentuation: Many complex fills are included.
Use randomly: Different kinds of fills are used in a random order.
Loop Finder
The Loop Finder has been developed to find the BPM in short rhythmic passages, to
integrate short loops in an existing arrangement, or to yield drum loops from short
rhythmic passages. Otherwise, the BPM Finder helps in this regard.
More information under “Effects” menu.
Harmony Agent

The Harmony Agent is designed to analyze harmonies.
The music track is analyzed first when you open the Harmony Agent. The Harmony
Agent tries to automatically identify the harmonies for each beat of the music. Thus

78
www.magix.com
the right beat information is an important prerequisite for a properly-functioning
Harmony Agent.
During subsequent playback, the detected harmony is played by an internal generator
for verification purposes. You can adjust the volume with "Volume Generator".
"Mute" deactivates the generator.
The transport control controls playback of the music track. The position slider below
lets you quickly move to a certain passage.
Check and correct the automatic harmony recognition
After the analysis, you can manually correct harmonies which were not correctly
identified. Note that major chords are written with capital letters and minor chords
with lower-case letters.
Left click on the respective harmony symbol in the wave display. Hold the key if you
want to mark several subsequent harmonies. If you right-click on selected harmony
symbols, a menu containing alternatives will be displayed. The initially recognized
harmony is marked with an *.
If there are no alternatives, you can select the correct "Keytone" or "Chord" from the
"Correction" section of the menus. Use the option "Replace selected harmony in the
entire song" if you are sure that the incorrectly recognized harmony is not included in
the entire song. A mix-up between major and minor is typical in this case.
Once you are sure that all harmonies are set correctly, click on "Continue".
Use harmony recognition
Here you can use the information from the Harmony Agent. There are different
possibilities to output harmonies.
• You can create picture objects in the arrangement that display harmonies
graphically in the video monitor and in sync with the music.
• You can save the information in the audio file. This also ensures that the
harmonies are available later. For instance, if you want to display the harmony
information in the timeline ("Edit -> Display Object Marker -> Harmony
Marker").
• You can choose between different displays of the harmony symbols. You can use
German, English or Roman symbols to name the tones. Furthermore, you can set
the "preceding symbol" to force single harmony interpretation. With #, all notes
are shown as "sharps" (C#, D#, F#), with B they are displayed as flats.
Text to speech
In this dialog reached in the Effects > Audio dialog, you can get speech from typed
text. You can choose from a range of different types of voices. You can change the

Audio Objects 79

speed and volume of the spoken passages. Once you've settled on a suitable voice a
WAV file will be created. This can of course be used in the arranger like any other
audio object.
Load text: Here you can load any text file (formats: *.txt or *.rtf).
Save text: Your entered text can be saved.
Test: After entering your text, you can preview the result.
Voice: You can choose from various voice types.
Speed: Playback speed can be regulated with this controller.
Volume: Output volume is regulated with this control.
Format: Here you can determine the quality of the created wave file (.wav).
File: Path selection for the wave file to be created.

80
www.magix.com
MIDI Objects
Arrange MIDI objects
MIDI objects may be moved, the volume may be modified (middle handle), or fades
(in/out) may be added (top right and left handles) in the same way as audio, video, or
synthesizer objects. Use the lower handles to "stretch out" individual MIDI loops so
that they easily fit onto a whole track.
Pay attention to the following:
• Volume changes in MIDI objects (central handle or fades in/out) are controlled
by adjusting the velocity level (MIDI velocity). Many synthesizers do not change
the volume, but rather the sound in relation to the velocity level. In this case, use
the effects curve automation function.
• MIDI objects always control a single synthesizer per track. If you move a MIDI
object onto another track, then a different synthesizer will be controlled and the
sound of the arrangement changes accordingly.
Transpose MIDI
This function in the the context-menu is used to change the pitch of a MIDI object.
Simply enter the number of half tone steps by which the playback is to be transposed
up or down! The transposition is shown in the MIDI Object in the arranger with "+n"
and "-n" (n is the number of halftones).
Load MIDI files
Proceed as follows to integrate MIDI files into an arrangement:
1. Open a directory containing MIDI files using the Media Pool.
2. Click a MIDI file and it will be played back immediately; this makes it easy to
load audio files without guessing.
3. Now drag the desired file into the arrangement and that's it!
4. An MIDI object will appear in which the MIDI notes are shown by dots; the
high notes are dots in the upper section, and the lower notes are the dots
further down in the lower section. You can even see the velocity of the notes:
the louder the note is played, the darker it appears on the screen.
MAGIX Music Maker 2013 uses the external MIDI device (view page 82) to preview
a MIDI file in the Media Pool without using software instruments. If you can't hear the
MIDI file, then there may be different reasons for this:
• Check the MIDI output device in the "Program settings" window via the
"Audio/MIDI" tab (P key or "File > Settings > Program settings"). "Microsoft CD
Wavetable SW synth", a standard software synthesizer included in Windows
®
as

MIDI Objects 81

an OS component, should be set as the default. If sound cards with their own
synthesizer are used or in case MIDI hardware synthesizers are connected, set
the sound card's MIDI driver or a MIDI interface!
• The sound car synthesizer's volume is set via the the sound card mixer. Double
click the small loudspeaker icon in the tray and find the controller for the SW
synthesizer.
• Several sound cards cannot use the SW synth simultaneously with ASIO drivers.
The "Microsoft GS Wavetable SW-Synth" is treated as an external MIDI device,
which means that even while it produces sounds in the computer, it is still not a
component of MAGIX Music Maker 2013. If you want to export a sound from the
arrangement, then you will have to record it beforehand (see Converting MIDI objects
to audio files (view page 83)). The sound quality of the device is rather modest
compared to "proper" software synthesizers like MAGIX Vita or Revolta.
It's easier if you assign different software synthesizers to the MIDI object after you
load it. MIDI files of complete songs, for example like you might find on the Internet,
often contain multiple tracks that control different instruments. MAGIX Music Maker
2013 is able to use one software synthesizer per track. For this reason, duplicate your
MIDI one beneath the other as often as there are different instruments involved and
set the corresponding Channel filters (view page 87) in the MIDI objects ("Options"
menu in the MIDI Editor) so that each object only plays the notes for a single channel.
Next, assign software instruments for the individual channels via the Track (view page
31) menu.
Connect external equipment
USB-MIDI keyboards
Over the last few years, controls for software synthesizers have produced a new class
of devices: USB-MIDI keyboards. These devices usually do not contain separate
sound generators, but rather consist of just a keyboard, different controls, and a MIDI
interface that is connected via USB cable to the computer.
These keyboards usually do not need special drivers - they only need to be connected.
Make sure that the device is switched on and is able to be detected prior to starting
MAGIX Music Maker 2013, since the available MIDI ports are only able to be
discovered during program launch!
Under some circumstances, you may have to select the MIDI input device via the
Program settings ("Audio" tab) (view page 206). This is usually called "USB audio
device"
Note: Some older devices do not function in some cases in Windows XP. Even
though the device has been detected, the corresponding MIDI drivers do not appear
in the list. In this case, please contact MAGIX customer support!

82
www.magix.com
MIDI cabling
MIDI inputs/outputs: If your computer has an internal or external MIDI port, or has a
MIDI-capable sound card installed, connect your MIDI keyboard’s “MIDI out” to the
computer’s “MIDI in” (on the interface, sound card, and so on).
If your MIDI keyboard can generate its own sounds, connect the computer’s “MIDI
out” to the keyboard’s “MIDI in”. If your computer (or the MIDI device) offers more
than one MIDI output, connect any other sound synthesizers to these. If the computer
only has one MIDI output, you need to connect the second sound synthesizer’s "MIDI
in" to the keyboard’s "MIDI thru" port. A third device can be connected to the
second’s "MIDI thru", and so on. The "MIDI thru" port always delivers a copy of the
signals coming into the device’s "MIDI in". It is preferable, however, to use a direct
connection from a computer’s "MIDI out" to a device, rather than chaining too many
devices one after the other. Timing problems may occur in the chain if a lot of MIDI
commands are sent in a short space of time. This is due to the slight delays
introduced by each "MIDI in" to "MIDI thru" transaction. If your computer also
features several MIDI inputs, they can be used for the connection of MIDI expanders.
MIDI local off: If your keyboard features an internal sound source, it is important that
you stop the keyboard from generating sounds directly from its own keyboard. If you
buy a new keyboard that is to be used without a sequencer and connect it straight to
an amplifier, you would expect the device to make a sound when you press its keys. In
other words, the keyboard is internally connected to the sound synthesizer. This
behavior, however, is not what you want to happen when using your keyboard with
MAGIX Music Maker 2013. In this scenario, the keyboard is used as the computer’s
input device, and MAGIX Music Maker 2013 is sending (i.e. playing) MIDI
information to any connected sound synthesizer, be they the keyboard’s own sound
generator, a sound card, or any other connected sound module.
If you wanted to control and record another sound module using your keyboard as the
input device, its own sounds would play alongside those of the other sound
synthesizer, which is why the keyboard must be separated from its own internal
synthesizer. This function is known as “Local OFF”, and is set directly on your
keyboard. Refer to your keyboard’s manual for information on how to do this. Don’t
worry about “breaking” the link between the keyboard and its internal sound
generator – MAGIX Music Maker 2013 will act as the “missing link” in this scenario.
External synthesizers
Naturally, MIDI objects can also be played back over a MIDI interface onto external
synthesizers, sound modules, etc. "Pure" MIDI output takes place (i.e. without using
software synthesizer plug-ins) assuming that the MIDI output device has been
properly set (see previous sections); in this way, any MIDI object may be sent to an
external synthesizer.

MIDI Objects 83

Note: If a MIDI object is on a track which features a software synthesizer, then this
will be controlled first. To play the object on an external sound synthesizer via MIDI
output, select "no VSTi" from the list of software synthesizer.
Convert MIDI objects into audio files
If you use VST instruments, you won't have to convert these MIDI objects into audio
data before exporting your entire arrangement, since the sound is created on your
computer and can be processed there. If you wish to do this nevertheless (e.g. to
provide some relief to your PC), then use the function 'Combine audio (view page 55)'
All MIDI objects that control external synthesizers via a MIDI interface (view page
82) will have to be converted into audio objects if you want them to be exported as
well. They only contain control information for sound generation.
In order to do this, the output of the MIDI synthesizer (e.g., the sound card) must be
connected to the input of the sound card. The MIDI data can then be played and
recorded simultaneously via the record function. This produces an audio file that can
be edited and exported together with the multimedia files as usual.
Playing and recording MIDI synthesizer
MAGIX Music Maker 2013 allows you to play and record software synthesizers or
external MIDI devices from the arranger. The MIDI Editor does not need to be opened
for this, which was previously the case in the former version.
Presuming that the MIDI input and output devices are set correctly (see above), then
you should be able to play any synthesizer that is loaded via the MIDI keyboard.
MIDI recording mode must be activated in the corresponding track by
clicking "Rec" twice in the track box. Now, all of the notes that you play via
the keyboard will be played back through the synthesizer.
If a software instrument is loaded via the track box or opened via the MIDI Editor,
then MIDI recording mode is activated automatically.
Tip: You can also play a synthesizer live without an external MIDI keyboard. The
Media Pool features an On-screen keyboard that may also be operated via the
computer keyboard.

In order to record a new MIDI object, simply click the red "Record" button
in the transport bar


84
www.magix.com
MIDI Editor
The MIDI Editor makes it possible for you to edit MIDI objects. The MIDI Editor
provides different sub-editors, views, areas, and aids to do this.
Double clicking a MIDI object opens the MIDI Piano Roll Editor for advanced
recording/editing of MIDI objects.
Tip: The Media Pool features a smaller version of the MIDI Editor. Select the MIDI
object you would like to edit and then click the Settings Object Inspector button.
This MIDI Editor may be operated identically to the "bigger" version that features its
own window; of course, the menu and different play and recording settings will not
be available.

In the center you'll find the Piano Roll Editor in which the notes are displayed as bars
and from which they can be edited using the mouse. There are various buttons
located just above the Piano Roll.

Clicking on this button opens the Event list (view page 92). In this list you
can view all MIDI data of a MIDI object, including those that cannot be
edited in the piano roll or controller editor. You can use the Event List to
remove unwanted commands included with imported MIDI files.

Use this button to switch to Drum Editor (view page 98) mode.

MIDI Objects 85


You can use this to leave the Drum Editor and return to the Piano Roll
section.

Clicking on this button opens the Controller Editor (view page 90) in the
bottom area. This allows you to edit features such as the note velocity,
pitchwheel, and controller data.

Deletes all MIDI data from the object. Now you can begin from the start
again...

Of course, "Undo/Redo" is also available for all changes you make in the
MIDI Editor.
Along the top edge, you will also find the buttons for selecting the editing tools (view
page 88), for quantization (More information can be found in the section
"Quantization settings" on page 94), and for the output (view page 85) used by the
MIDI object (MIDI out or VST instrument).
Select sounds
The sound of virtual instruments (VST plug-ins), is produced by the synthesizer chip
of the sound card or by external MIDI synthesizers. Each MIDI object can produce as
many sounds as the corresponding synthesizer offers. The sounds themselves can be
specified in the instrument – regardless whether its a virtual VST Instrument or a
hardware device.
If there is no VST instrument loaded, the MIDI object uses the MIDI output for the
external synthesizer or for the Microsoft™ Windows® supplied synthesizer. The MIDI
output can be adjusted in the "Program settings" window in the "Audio/MIDI" tab (P
key or via "File" menu > Settings > Program settings"

Select the desired VST instrument from the menu. You can test the same MIDI object
with various VST synthesizers. You can set the sound of VST instruments in the VST
instrument editor (view page 126). You can open the instrument editor with a right-
click on the VSTi name or a left mouse click on the cogwheel symbol.
You can set up the MIDI output channel under MIDI channel. This is important for
VST instruments which can receive MIDI notes on multiple channels and play several
different sounds simultaneously (multi-timbral).
Play/ PlaySolo
Play solo only plays the MIDI object for which the MIDI editor is opened
(corresponding with the filter settings of the options menu).
Play all plays the entire arrangement.

86
www.magix.com
Playing instruments with the keyboard
Open the MIDI editor to be able to play software instruments directly via the
computer keyboard. The assignment of the notes to the computer keyboard is
displayed in the following graphic.

"Page up" and "Page down" move the octave up or down.
MIDI Record options
You may also begin MIDI recording directly in the MIDI Editor. To do so, simply click
the red "REC" button. Compared to the simple "Record" featured directly in the
"Arranger", this version features several additional options for you to select
Overdub: Normally, existing notes are deleted with each new recording. "Overdub"
simply adds new MIDI notes to the existing MIDI recording. "Overdub" allows you to
create a completely new MIDI song step-by-step (or take-for-take).
Cycle: This plays the MIDI object in a loop during recording. This enables you to let
the object play through a few times before you get started recording your own
melody.
Metronome: In order to play back the proper tempo, you can activate the MIDI
metronome to provide the beats. This is only for orientation while you play and is not
recorded.

Play arrangement during recording: If this option is active, then the
arrangement will play during recording.


MIDI Objects 87

Notation display, movement, zoom
MIDI data can be edited in three main areas in the MIDI editor.
• Piano roll (view page 89)
• Velocity editor (view page 90)
• Lists editor (view page 92)
Here various tools are available, e.g. pencil or eraser.
Fundamentally, changes, e.g. moving or deleting notes, always refer to all selected
MIDI events (red) with just a few exceptions. Changes to the selection in a range
always apply to every other range as well. For example, you can select a group of
notes in the piano roll and then change the velocity of these note groups which
modifies all selected notes simultaneously.
Note display in the piano roll and the controller editor (with velocity curves)
All of the unselected notes are highlighted in blue. The intensity of the color indicates
the velocity of the note; the darker/stronger the color, the higher the velocity.
Selected notes are highlighted in red. Again, higher velocity notes are brighter than
lower velocity ones.
Note: You can also customize the velocity color range for selected notes. To do this,
open the graphics file "vel_sel_map.bmp" from the bitmap directory and modify the
color spectrum accordingly.
Current event: This is displayed in bright red and with a red outline. The properties of
the currently selected event are displayed in the edit fields above the piano roll. An
event is "current" when it is selected with the mouse.
Event display filters
To get a better overview of a MIDI object's events, you can filter specific events for
the display.
A MIDI object can contain events in up to 16 channels and up to 16 MIDI tracks
(original track from the imported standard MIDI file). For example, it's possible to
control a multi-output VST instrument using a single object on several MIDI channels.
Notes in the corresponding MIDI editor can be edited simultaneously or only in one
selected channel within this object.
There are comfortable viewing options available for this:
• A channel filter ("Options" menu) enables all or only selected channels to be
displayed. Notes in the remaining channels are grayed out and cannot be
manipulated by the selection tool.

88
www.magix.com
Example: The MIDI object includes notes in the MIDI channels 1, 2, and 5. You can
now make all notes in channels 2 and 5 accessible for the selection and editing tools
via the selection of the MIDI channels in the channel filter by selecting the two
channels from the menu. All unselected, filtered notes in channel 1 are displayed in
gray in the piano editor and the list editor.
Events in the filtered channels can be completely hidden using the "Hide filtered MIDI
data" in the "Options" menu.
• A track filter (also "Options" menu) enables data to be filtered according to an
imported MIDI file in the same way.
• The list editor (view page 92) provides additional display filters that only function
within the list. The display filters are activated by the playback filter settings
(mute settings), but the filters can be set independently of one another.
Muted events display
Events that lie ahead of the object start point or behind the object end point (the start
and end points are displayed as blue lines in the editor) are also paler than the un-
muted events within the object’s boundaries. If display transparency is activated, the
outside events are grayed out.
Events above or below the currently visible selection
There are two small red indicators above and below the vertical scroll bar on the right
border of the MIDI editor window. These light up correspondingly if there are other
notes outside of the currently displayed screen selection.
Piano Roll - Edit events
There are various editing options for notes within the Piano Roll, as well as mouse
modes. In all modes (except Delete) the same functions also apply to notes when
editing them, so that these modes only differ in behavior when you click on empty
areas.
Editing tools

Selection
(Ctrl + 1)
Lasso: Press and hold down the mouse button to draw out a
rectangular selection frame.
Clicking on a free range highlights an existing selection.

Draw
(Ctrl + 2)
A note can be drawn with a left-click. The beginning and
length are set according to the current quantization settings
(above).

Drum (draw)
(Ctrl + 3)
Draws a series of notes. The note length and distances are
calculated from the current quantization settings.
When holding Alt: The pitch of the first note is also
maintained for all notes drawn subsequently.
Moving the mouse backwards (to the left) while depressing
the mouse button removes drawn notes.

MIDI Objects 89


Pattern
(draw)
(Ctrl + 4)
This mode allows you to draw entire Drum Patterns (or
melody patterns). If you want to create a new pattern, you
have to select it first in "Selection Mode" and press the keys
Ctrl+N simultaneously (or go to menu "Edit" in the
"MIDI/Drum Editor > Create pattern from selection"). If you
have created a pattern, you can start drawing at any position.
Draw the pattern at the position of the deepest note of the
pattern. This makes an original pitch sound, but you can, of
course, draw in a different pitch.
If <Alt> is pressed when drawing, the pitch of the first note
will be applied to all notes drawn that follow it.
Moving the mouse back (to the left) while holding down the
mouse button removes the notes which were just drawn.

Velocity
Mode
(Ctrl + 5)
This mode allows you to mark events and change the velocity
values of all selected events in relation to each other.
Absolute values are entered when you hold the Shift key, i.e.
all changed events receive the same velocity value.

Delete
(Ctrl + 6)
Clicking on the selected note deletes all selected notes.
Dragging the mouse deletes all notes underneath the eraser.
The Delete mode can be activated anytime by clicking with
the right mouse button. For instance, you can use the pen to
insert new notes when left-clicking and remove already
inserted notes with a right-click, without having to change
tools.

Magnifying
glass
(Ctrl + 7)
Left mouse button: Zoom in
Right Mouse Button: Zoom out
Left mouse button + drag: Zooms in on the range.

Selecting MIDI events
(Piano roll, velocity editor, list editor, )
Select event Left click event
Add/delete event from selection Ctrl + left click event
Select current event and unselect all
other events
Double click event
Change or set current event within
multiple selection
Left click selected event
Select events from the same line or
area
Click while pressing the "Shift" key
Selects all notes of the same pitch Double click the desired key on the keyboard
ruler to the left
Selects all notes Ctrl + A (if a pitch is selected on the keyboard
ruler, only notes with this pitch are selected)
Selects the next or previous note Arrow keys

90
www.magix.com
As you can see from this list, a simple click is all it takes to choose a specific event for
editing – even from selections containing several events such as a pattern.
Edit notes with the mouse
If you move the mouse over a note, the mouse cursor will change and, depending on
the part of the note, the following options will be available:

Change note start time (Grab note bar at the beginning, note end
remains the same)

Change note length (Grab note length at end)
+ Shift
Set fixed note length for multi-selection: Hold "Shift" and drag the
current reference note longer/shorter – all notes will have the same
length
+ Ctrl
Scale note length for multi-selection: Hold "Ctrl" and drag current
reference note longer – all notes will be lengthened by the same factor

Move note freely, pitch and start time change

If in "Move" mode "Alt" is also pressed, the note will only be moved
horizontally, retain pitch (in free move mode, hold "Alt")

If "Shift" is pressed while in "Free draw" mode, only the pitch can be
changed, the position will remain the same.
/ "Ranges for limited moving": If you activate this setting in the
"Options" menu, clicking and dragging in the start portion of the note
only results in a change to the position, while clicking on the end
portion changes the pitch.

Moving and zooming
The vertical and horizontal view or zoom are adjusted with the scroll bars just like in
the project window.
Mouse wheel: Scroll horizontally
Shift + mouse wheel: Zoom vertically
Shift + Ctrl + mouse wheel: Scroll vertically
Ctrl + mouse wheel: Zoom horizontally
Controller editor - Selecting and editing events
The controller editor is located below the piano roll and can be hidden.

It is opened either with a click on the button below the keyboard or via "Alt +
V".
The velocity values of existing events are displayed as colored bars in the controller
editor, whereby darker and higher bars symbolize larger values. The bars are located
directly below the notes.
The values of all other controllers will appear in controller editor as ramps. Here, too
the height of the ramps and their color intensity represent the last defined value of

MIDI Objects 91

each event. The length of the represented ramps reached to the next varying event.
Selected event ramps are also represented in red.
Controller Editor Hints
• In polyphonic events, the bars are layered on top of each other, which can make it
difficult to single out specific notes. To edit only notes with a certain pitch (such
as all C1 notes in the controller editor), click the corresponding key in the
keyboard ruler. The key and the background color of the selected pitch are
highlighted, and only the notes with this pitch are displayed in the controller
editor.
• Notes with different pitches (such as all C1, D1 and A1 notes) can be displayed
simultaneously by pressing "Ctrl" while clicking them (or "Shift" for areas
between notes). This is basically a velocity editor view option. Multiple notes can
be selected with a double-click.
• Another aspect of working with the controller editor’s layered controller bars is
that the bar of the currently selected note (mouse selection/editing) is always on
top. To change this, click on the note you want to edit in the piano roll, or click
directly on the layered bars and switch between the notes with the arrow keys.
You can then change the controller value by clicking on the top third of the red
(current) part of the top bar.
• After drawing controller values with the pen tool, click on an unselected area and
drag the mouse to change several velocity values in sequence. Move the mouse
in a curve to create velocity curves. Existing (multiple) selections are ignored.
This is a great method for creating crescendos or decrescendos.
Tools
The Controller Editor has its own tools for editing curves and values.

Controller selection: A click on the menu area of the button opens a
selection menu in which the MIDI controller for editing can be selected.

Selection: This is a combi tool used for value changes as well as freehand and
line drawing.
Click in the upper range of a controller bar to modify the controller value immediately
by dragging. Clicking in the lower two thirds of the bar selects the corresponding note
which is then highlighted in red in the editors.
Select multiple controller bars by clicking and dragging a range in the Controller
Editor; individual values can be selected by single-clicking within the bar. Selected
controller events will be highlighted red.
Combi tool editing options:
• Click on the bar end + drag: The controller value can now be adjusted by dragging
vertically. If you hold the "Shift" key down while dragging, all of the selected

92
www.magix.com
events will be set to the same value. If you also hold down "Ctrl", then the values
of multiple selected controllers will be changed relative to one another.
• Alt + Drag: This activates freehand drawing; the mouse pointer becomes a pencil.
By dragging in the corresponding controller area, you can draw in any number of
controller curves.
• Shift + Drag: This activates line drawing and the mouse pointer becomes a cross
hairs. By dragging horizontally, you can draw in linear value curves (ramps).

Freehand drawing: Draws new controller value curves or individual values by
single-clicking without dragging.
By dragging backwards, you can delete your curve during drawing. Shift + Drag with
the cross hairs to draw a line.

Draw lines: Use the line function to insert a transition between two different
controller values.
Hint: If you edit velocity with the draw tools, no new notes are generated; only
existing velocity values are modified.
Quantize controller events
MIDI controller events can be quantized and thinned out; select the "MIDI functions"
menu and the "Quantize/Thin out controller" command to do this. Quantization
occurs according to the quantization settings (view page 94).
List Editor
The MIDI editor contains an integrated list display of all events with additional view
and edit options. This list editor is opened either by clicking on the button above the
keyboard or using the shortcut "Alt + L".
When the list editor is open and ready to receive input, it will have a narrow red
border. This makes it clear that certain functions, for example, select next/previous
event (cursor keys) or the "Select all" (Ctrl + A) command, only refer to the list.
In the list editor, not only note events but also the MIDI controller and Sysex
messages are displayed. These controllers and messages can be displayed or even
filtered out during playback ("Mute").
"Note on" and "Note Off" events belong to each note, which are then selected as pairs
and edited ("Note off" events can be displayed and hidden with a tick in the check box
below the editor).
To edit specific events only, the list editor provides a view filter for each column.
These are small check boxes below the columns of the list editor.

MIDI Objects 93

Select a representative event. For example, this could be a note with a certain pitch.
Then click on a display filter for a specific column to only display events of this type
with the selected pitch. All other events will now be faded out.
Display filters can be combined with one another. This way, when working with the
"Select all" command (Ctrl + A), you can select and edit all control change events of
type 10 (volume) on MIDI channel 6.
Quantize
Small irregularities when playing to record can be smoothened with the quantization
function. In contrast to this, mechanical sounding sequences can be made a little
more groovy by applying the Swing function.

Clicking on the Quantize button shifts all selected notes to a customizable
quantization grid.
All notes are quantized without previous selection.

1/4, 1/8, 1/16, and 1/32 notes and corresponding
triplets can be selected as starting points (grid)
and lengths.
The Quantize button always performs standard quantization (the note's start point
and length are preset). MIDI functions (view page 95) -> Advanced quantization
provides other quantization modes (e.g. length only or Soft Q).
The quantization options enable the type and scope of the quantization to be set
more precisely.
Quantization grid ("Snap")

If snap is activated, the notes "snap" to the quantization values when they
are created or edited.
The quantization values are also considered. For instance, the notes snap to the
corresponding positions within the quantization window.
The snap positions are displayed within the piano roll as a matrix. A swing
quantization is displayed by the different intervals of the vertical partitions in the
piano roll. The grid can be hidden with the "Show quantization grid" command in the
options menu ("Alt + G").
You can deactivate the snap function while creating or editing notes by holding down
"Alt" as you draw them.
Move relatively on grid ("Options" menu): If this option is active, then notes keep
their original intervals relative to the grid and not to the note start when they are
moved; the distance moved snaps to the quantization value. Use this option if you
want to move unquantized notes a certain distance without disturbing the timing.

94
www.magix.com
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + G
Quantization settings
The quantization settings can be found in the menu "MIDI functions -> Extended
quantization" in the MIDI editor. The dialog with the settings is not "modal", i. e. you
can open it as required and test certain passages with different settings.

The selected quantization settings may be visualized in the top of the dialog. The blue
lines indicate the target positions for the quantized notes, i.e. the snap points. The
gray area around this show the quantization window i.e. the target positions that are
affected by the quantization.
Q-grid/length: The quantization grid and length at which target points within the beat
on which the note start points or lengths move (see above).
Q threshold/ Q window: This parameter may be used to slightly vary quantization by
excluding notes from quantization that are very close to the next quantization value.
"Q window" refers to the interval to the left and right of a grid point; events will be
quantized within this range. Quantization does not take place outside of this window.
This means that events with distance less than the "threshold" or more then the
"window" from the grid point will not be quantized. The affected target range will be
indicated in gray in the dialog graphic.
Swing: Starts swinging, groovy playback (for example, triplet). Specifies the division
for uneven grid points.

MIDI Objects 95

• 50 ... “50-50” division: The odd eighths are exactly half way between the even
eighth notes (“even” playing method)
• 67... triplet playing method, 3-2 division
Offset: The value range in this parameter stretches from -100 to +100. By changing
the offset values, you move the whole quantization grid. Negative values move the
quantization to the left, i.e. forward in time; positive values move to the right i.e.
further in time. The maximum of 100 corresponds with an offset of half the grid width.
Presentation of blue grid points in the dialog and the grid in the MIDI editor directly
reflects changes to these values.
Humanize: The "Humanize" parameter creates another variation option, i.e. notes are
able to be assigned according to the randomization principle up to a specific interval
to positions around the exact quantization value. The setting occurs in % of a 16th
note. The value specified therefore determines the possible interval between the
quantized notes and the exact quantization value.
Soft Q: This value sets the strength or "Soft Q" value of the quantization.
• "100" moves the event precisely to the quantize grid point,
• "50" shifts the event to the middle between the current position and the
quantization grid point,
• "0" means no movement -> Quantization off
The command "Soft Q" command considers the current level value in the quantization
options. The simple quantization command always occurs at 100%. In this manner,
you can always select between approximation (soft) and a harder quantization
without having to adjust the quantization options every time.
Standard quantization settings: Select from a list of quantization actions (see MIDI
functions) that are listed by clicking the "Quantization" button.
Reset quantization: All notes are rest to there original positions.
Standard settings: Restores the default values.
MIDI functions
The "MIDI functions" menu contains advanced quantization (More information can
be found in the section "Quantization settings" on page 94) and editing functions for
MIDI notes.
The commands in the "MIDI functions" menu always affect the selected notes. If no
notes have been selected, all functions are applied to all notes.
Legato: Notes may be sustained until the next note, i.e. legato.

96
www.magix.com
Quantize notes (default): A default quantization is applied to all of the selected
notes. If no notes are selected, then all notes will be quantized. The default action may
be specified in the Quantization settings (view page 94) dialog. "Quantize notes
(start and length)" is the default. This function can be accessed via the "Quantization"
button in the MIDI editor.
Advanced quantization
This submenu contains additional quantization commands.
Start Q: Selected notes will be quantized corresponding to the set grid quantization
value. Note lengths remain unaffected.
Start and length Q: Selected notes will be quantized corresponding to the set grid and
length quantization values. Hard quantization always occurs at 100%.
Soft Q: This command considers the current level values in the quantization options.
The simple quantization command always occurs at 100%. In this manner, you can
always select between approximation (soft) and a harder quantization without having
to adjust the quantization options every time.
Length Q: Selected notes will be quantized according to the set length quantization
value. The start time remains unaffected.
Quantize notes to grid: The end of selected notes will be quantized according to the
set grid quantization value. The start time remains unaffected, but the note lengths
will change.
Reverse quantization: With this command, you can reverse all completed
quantization steps. This functions even after the arrangement has been saved.
Quantization settings: Opens the selection dialog for the Quantization settings (view
page 94).
Quantize controller events: Allows you to quantize controller events (view page 92)
to reduce their number.
Mute notes (Mute): Mutes and unmutes notes or selected note groups with a click.
Remove overlaps (polyphonic): Notes may be shortened so that there no longer are
any overlaps. Chords (simultaneously played notes) are recognized and not
corrected, i. e. chords are not split up.
Remove overlaps (monophonic): Notes may be shortened so that there no longer are
any overlaps. Forces monophonic voice leading.
Convert sustain pedal to note lengths: This function converts sustain pedal controller
events (controller 64) into note lengths. All notes which were started after a "Pedal

MIDI Objects 97

pressed" event (CC64 > 64) will be extended to the "Release pedal" event (CC64 <
64), and the pedal events removed.
MIDI editor techniques
You can cut-and-paste MIDI notes within the editor and between MIDI objects. The
notes are always inserted at the play cursor’s position.
Duplicate: The selected notes are copied and inserted after the next grid point if the
quantization grid is active (menu "Options -> Quantization grid on"), or immediately
after the selection if the grid is inactive.
Create pattern from selection ("Ctrl + P"): The length of the pattern is quantized if
the grid is active. The pattern can be "painted" into the MIDI object using the mouse
mode "Pattern painting".
To directly select notes with a specific pitch, double click on an empty area in the
piano roll editor or in the keyboard ruler.
MIDI Editor shortcuts
Playback/Stop Space
Stop at position '0' (Number block)
Delete all selected events Ctrl + Del
Delete selected MIDI notes Del
Select all non display-filtered notes (piano roll) or
events (list)
Ctrl + A
Mute notes Ctrl + M
Create pattern from selection Ctrl+W
MIDI recordings Ctrl+R
Undo (Undo) Ctrl + Z
Restore (Redo) Ctrl + Y
Cut Ctrl+X
Copy Ctrl+C
Insert Ctrl+V
duplicating Ctrl+D
Imported standard MIDI file Ctrl+I
Exported standard MIDI file Ctrl + E
Fade in/Out Event Editor Ctrl+L
Fade Velocity In/Out Ctrl + T
Show Quantization grid Ctrl+K

Mode selection Ctrl + 1
Drawing mode Ctrl + 2
Drum (Draw Mode) Ctrl + 3
Pattern (Drawing) Mode Ctrl + 4
Change velocity Ctrl + 5
Delete Mode Ctrl + 6

98
www.magix.com
Zoom Tool Ctrl + 7

Quantize Ctrl + Q
Quantization options Alt + Q
Select previous Note/Event Up/Left arrow
Select next Note/Event Tight/Down arrow
Play selected notes Ctrl+N
End all notes Ctrl+P
Grid on/off Ctrl+G
Auto-scrolling during playback Ctrl+F
Vertical zoom in Ctrl + Up arrow
Vertical zoom out Ctrl + Down arrow
Horizontal zoom in Ctrl + Left arrow
Horizontal zoom out Ctrl + Right arrow
Horizontal scrolling Mouse wheel
Vertical scrolling Shift + Mouse wheel
Zooming Ctrl + Mouse wheel


MIDI Objects 99

Drum Editor
After opening the MIDI Editor (double-click on the MIDI object), switch to the
corresponding field

in the Drum Editor by clicking. Instead of the piano keys to the left, you now see a list
of drum instruments.

Note: If a drum map is active in the Arranger track (recognizable by the word "map"
in t he MIDI area of the Track Editor), the Drum Editor is loaded automatically when
the MIDI Editor is loaded.
Drum Editor track box: In the individual track boxes of the Drum Editor you can
individually adjust MIDI channel, grid, quantization length, display width in cell mode
and velocity scaling for each drum instrument in %.
Velocity scaling: The velocity value of each note is multiplied by the V value/100 and
adjusted to the MIDI velocity between 1 and 127. Scaling is audible, however, it is not
visualized further. Scaling is audible, but is not visualized further.
Cell Editing Mode: (view page 100) When the Drum Editor opens, Cell Mode
activates by default. In addition, you can individually set the display width for each
track box in the Drum Editor.

100
www.magix.com
Switch to Drum Editor Mode and back.
After opening the MIDI editor (double click the MIDI object), switch to
"Drum editor" mode by pressing the drum editor button.

Instead of the piano keys to the left, you now see a list of drum instruments.
When you switch from "Drum editor" mode back to the normal piano roll, you will be
asked if you wish to apply mapping or not. If you add mapping, all mapping settings
(which makes a note sound different to how it is displayed) will be applied to the
MIDI object. If notes, for example, are routed through channel 10 (GM drum channel)
via mapping, the notes will be replaced by corresponding "real" note events on
channel 10.
Cell mode
"Cell" mode serves to improve the overview as it limits the display to only the most
important information, note starting points, and velocity.
Each time position of a bar is displayed as a row of cells in on/off states. The note
length is not displayed, but rather a unified display width is used. This way, it all looks
similar to the step sequencer of a drum computer (see Robota (view page 121)).
The set quantization grid can be read from the width of cells. "Swing" and "Offset"
settings of the quantization options are also made clearer thanks to cells of various
widths and by repositioning.
The height of cells displays the velocity of the note. When drawing new drum notes
the velocity can be specified via the vertical drawing position within the cells. In
connection with the "Drum draw" mode, increasingly loud drum rolls can be drawn in
easily.
By clicking on the upper edge of a cell and dragging it vertically with the mouse, the
velocity can be adjusted directly without having to use the controller editor. In
"Velocity" mouse mode ("Ctrl + 5") it's even easier; all you need to do is click
anywhere on the cell.
Drum Editor trackbox
In the drum editor, each individual note has its own trackbox, and individual settings
can be specified for each instrument. When zoomed out, each trackbox can be
increased in size with a simple mouse click.

S/M: Each individual instrument can be played solo (S) or muted (M).

MIDI Objects 101

Note number: The output note from the instrument can be set here. This can be
different to the note currently displayed in the MIDI object so that individual drum
instruments can be substituted. To put the display of notes back into the usual order
(deep notes at the bottom, highs at the top), click on "Map" at the top and use the
"Sort drum map" command.
Instrument name: Double clicking on this field lets you rename your drum instrument.

Quantization options/colors: Use this menu to assign any one of the eight
different colors to the cells of a drum instrument. The dialog for the instrument's
quantization options is also opened here.
The dialog is the same as for global quantization options (view page 94), but the
settings only apply to the individual quantization options if an individual grid value is
set for the note as well.
K Output channel
# Quantization grid, "Glo" refers to the global value (More information can be found
in the section "Quantization settings" on page 94)
L Note length, # corresponds to the grid value, "Glo" to the global value

Length of the notation, # corresponds to the grid value (i. e. the entire cell width),
"Glo" refers to the global value of the note length
V Velocity scaling: The velocity value of each note is multiplied by the value set here
in %.
Scaling is audible, but is not visualized further. The purpose of this setting is the
customization of the volume ratio between the individual drum instruments. Software
instruments usually provide their own mixers.
Drum Maps
Drum maps specify individual instruments, e.g. bass, drum, hi hat, snare, etc. An
individual output note, MIDI channel, and velocity scaling can be set for each of these
instruments.

The drum map can be set in the drum editor by clicking
the "Map" field.
To split the drum names a "General MIDI" map is used by default. It may be the case
that your synthesizer (regardless if real or virtual) uses a different mapping setup.
This means that when you play the drum event, the sound you wish to hear may not
be heard (for example, instead of a bass drum, you get a high tom). In this case you
will have to re-sort your mapping setup. The settings for individual instruments can be
specified in the trackbox. For more extensive changes we recommend using the drum
map editor. There you can save your drum map as a file.
A project may contain various different drum maps. All drum maps saved in the
project can be selected via the menu. If you require a drum map from a *.map file, you

102
www.magix.com
will have to load it into the drum map editor first so that if can be shown in the menu.
You can edit the individual drum maps in the drum map editor.
Drum Map Editor
The drum map editor can be used to create and edit drum maps.
The "Drum maps" list on the left-hand side displays all drum maps which are available
to the project. The drum map GM General MIDI is always available to start off with.
New: Creates a new, empty drum map.
Copy: Creates a copy of the existing map. This way you can quickly create variations
of a drum map with various note allocations which can then be toggled via the drum
editor.
Load/Save: Use this to save a drum map (*.map file). This way you can use a drum
map you created for a synthesizer in other projects as well. All loaded maps will be
displayed in the "Map" menu of the drum editor.
Delete: Removes the selected drum map from the project.
Use the name field to rename the selected drum map. The settings (mapping) of the
individual notes for each drum map will be displayed below this in tabular format.
Pitch: This is the incoming MIDI note.
Instrument: Displays the name of the drum instrument, e.g. "Bassdrum 1".
Grid: If desired, you can set up a grid for the starting point of the drum events.
Length: In this field you can set the grid for the note length.
Output note: This is the note value to which the drum instrument (the incoming MIDI
note in the "Pitch" field) should be routed or mapped.
Channel: You can set up an individual channel for each instrument here.
Quantization options: This opens the dialog for the each instrument's quantization
options (view page 94).
Instrument, grid, length... apply to all: This applies the corresponding setting of the
selected instrument to all other instruments.

Software Instruments 103

Software Instruments
MAGIX Music Maker 2013 has many software synthesizers and synthesizer plug-ins
(VST instruments) for creating your own sound material. The synthesizers are either
VST plug-ins that are controlled by MIDI objects or Synth objects that can be
arranged with other objects in the tracks.
Here's an overview:
Synthesizers Type Use scenario
Atmos Synth object Background noise
BeatBox 2 or
BeatBox 2 plus (Premium
Version)
Synth object Nature and electronic beats
Loop Designer (view page 111) Synth object Breakbeats, bass lines
Livid Synth object acoustic drums (complete song
parts)
Robota Synth object electronic drums
Revolta 2
(only Premium-Version)
VST Plug-in Synthesizer leads, pads, sequence
figures
Vita VST Plug-in Nature instruments, guitar, bass,
acoustic drums, piano, strings,
horns
Vita Solo instruments VST Plug-in
VST plug-ins VST Plug-in depends on plug-ins installed


104
www.magix.com
Opening the synthesizers
The software synthesizers can be loaded just like any other objects in MAGIX Music
Maker 2013 through the Media Pool. To do this open the Instruments settings for the
Media Pool.

You will find icons for all available software synthesizers in the Media Pool. The upper
section contains all the VST instruments; the lower section displays the object
synthesizers.
Synth objects
MAGIX Music Maker 2013 contains many internal synthesizers for creating your own
drum patterns, break beats, bass lines, or ambient noise. The synthesizers are
represented either by internal synth objects that can be arranged together with other
objects on the tracks.
Every software synthesizer can be loaded into the arrangement via drag & drop. A
synth object appears in the appropriate track and the synthesizer interface opens, and
synth objects can be programmed via this interface. You should also read the sections
about the individual synthesizers.
You can start or stop the playback with the space bar. If the synth object has a play
button of its own (e.g. BeatBox), the plug-in can start it solo without playing the other
arrangement tracks.
If the synth objects melodies or rhythms are programmed, you can close the the
control console and arrange the synth object in the track. Synth objects are handled
like normal objects and can be edited with all available effects (view page 132), drawn
longer or made shorter using handles, or have their volume adjusted.

Software Instruments 105

The interface of any synth object can be opened for further editing by double clicking
it. In addition, any number of synth-objects from the same software synthesizer be
dragged onto the track and programmed separately. You can also split up synth
objects.
BeatBox 2
BeatBox 2 is a 16-voice drum computer with hybrid sound synthesis and a step
sequencer. The proven handling concepts of the "old" BeatBox like matrix
programming with auto copy have been expanded with comfortable editing of
velocities and significantly improved sound synthesis, including a multi-effects
section (one effect per drum instrument).
A drum sound is created in BeatBox 2 using a sample (analogously to the old
BeatBox) which is combined with a synthetic sound that can be created using up to
three different synthesis models (hybrid sound synthesis). BeatBox 2 plus enables
detailed editing and automation of all sound parameters.
There are two styles of interface in BeatBox 2. While closed, you can listen to included
sounds or those you've made in BeatBox 2 without using too much window space.

Only the most important control elements are displayed when the program window is
minimized.

Volume controller: Controls the volume.

Peakmeter and preset name: The peakmeter lets you visually control BeatBox 2.
Click on the triangle beside the preset name to open the preset list.

Next/Previous preset

Save preset: The preset includes the drum kit in use, the pattern, and any possible
automations.

Play/Stop: The playback controller in BeatBox 2 starts BeatBox without playing
the arrangement, too.

Edit button: The edit button opens BeatBox 2 for you to program your own beats
and sounds.

106
www.magix.com

Maximized BeatBox 2 window

Drum kit: This section loads drum kits (collections of different drum instruments)
and the individual drum instruments.

Selected drum instrument: The settings in the synthesis section (6) and
velocity/automation (5) always affect the selected drum instrument.

Pattern editor: Programs the beat sequence. In the top part, different patterns
(sequences) can be loaded and saved as well as different settings for the view
and function of the pattern editor. The matrix is where the beat is programmed:
One line corresponds to a drum instrument, and a column matches a specific
time position within 1-4 beats. If a cell is clicked on, then the respective drum
instrument will be triggered at this position.

Velocity: In the velocity section, the velocity levels for the selected instrument's
beats are displayed as a bar for detailed editing.

Synthesis: Selected sound parameters and the level of the effect for the selected
drum instrument can be edited here.
In the following, the sections of BeatBox 2 will be discussed individually:

Software Instruments 107

Drum kit
This section loads drum kits (collections of different
drum instruments) and the individual drum instruments.
You can also try out an already programmed pattern
with different kits or exchange individual drum
instruments.


Select drum kit: Use the <> buttons to switch through the different drum kits. A
drum kit is a collection of percussion instruments with matching sounds, e.g.
rock kit or electronic drums à la TR 808. By changing the drum kit, you can add
an entirely different sound to the rhythm you have already created.

Save drum kit: Use this button to save the current collection of drum
instruments as a kit.

Drum kit list: Click on the arrow right of the name to open a complete list of
available drum kits.

Select drum kit: The arrow buttons function analogously to those of the drum
kit. The sequence of drum instruments in the kit can be resorted via drag & drop.

Mute/Solo: The "solo" button switches a drum instrument solo, i.e. all other
instruments which are not "solo" will be muted. The "mute" button mutes a
drum instrument.
New drum or effect sounds can by added to the current drum kit by drag & drop from
Windows Explorer. Drag a wave file to a drum instrument to create a new drum
sound based on this sample. BeatBox 2 copies the sample into the sample folder to
make sure that the instrument or kit created can be used again later. You can drag a
complete folder with wave files to the drum kit to create a kit based on those samples.
Context menu
Right clicking a drum instrument always opens a context menu:
• Copy/Paste: Copy an instrument from a track and paste it to another one.
• Empty instrument: An empty instrument is added. No sound is played, it has no
name, and is used to clean up an unused track.
• Default instrument: The standard instrument is added. It has the standard
parameter for all synthesis shapes and serves as the starting point for your own
sounds.
• Reset automation: BeatBox 2's own presets contain automations. These are
dynamic sound parameters like filter curves or pitch changes. This command
allows you to completely remove these for the selected instruments.

108
www.magix.com
Pattern editor buttons


Pattern: Use the <> buttons to switch through the different patterns. The arrow
to the right opens a list of all available patterns, and the save button stores the
current pattern.

Clear track/all: All events for the selected instrument (track) or all events for
the pattern (all) are removed by clicking this button.

Bar selection: The bar you wish to edit can be selected via the corresponding
number button. Use the “Follow” button to select follow mode, i.e. the step
display follows the steps of the currently played beat. All shows all bars of the
pattern.

"1>2-4" Auto copy: If more than one bar is set as the pattern length, "Auto
copy" mode makes sure that the drum notes set in the first bar are
automatically placed into the next bars. This also makes it easy to create a
continuous beat, even with a loop length of four bars. Notes set in the bars
further back are not affected by the "Auto draw" function, which, for example,
makes faint variations detectable only in the fourth bar.

Bars: The maximum length of a drum pattern is four beats. The length can be
selected via the small scroll bar.

Shuffle: This controller changes BeatBox 2's timing. If the fader is turned to the
right, the eighth of a rhythm is played more and more like a triplet. If that
sounds a bit too abstract – simply try it out, ideally with a pure 1/16 hi hat
figure; you'll soon see what the shuffle fader is capable of.

Grid: Here you can set the time resolution of the BeatBox. You can choose from
1/8 notes (only for very simple rhythms), 1/16 (default), 1/32 (for more refined
constructions).

Pattern editor - matrix

This is the heart of BeatBox. A click on any position in the drum matrix creates or
deletes drum notes (events). Clicking and dragging draws in a series of notes.
Together with the velocity editing options (view page 109) (velocity), you can easily
create drum rolls.
If "Shift" is held when you click on notes in the range, a rectangle can be drawn out
which selects the notes contained within this rectangle (lasso selection). Selected
notes can be copied by dragging them to a new position. If "Ctrl" is also held down,

Software Instruments 109

then existing notes will remain at the target position. Delete all selected notes by right
clicking.
A simple mouse click cancels the selection. The selection is automatically canceled
after copying. If you want to keep your selection, hold down "Ctrl" while copying.
Keyboard shortcuts
Many functions in BeatBox 2 can be controlled with the keyboard, for example a beat
can be triggered with the "Enter" key live in a running pattern. Here's a complete list
of the keyboard commands:
General Key command
Open/Close editor e
Pattern editor - options
"1>2-4" Auto copy a
Follow f
Display bar 1... 4 1... 4
Show all bars 0
Grid finer/rougher +/-
Selected drum instrument
Previous/Next Cursor up/down
Preview p
Live input Enter
Mute on/off m
Solo on/off sec

Velocity
The velocity section serves for editing the velocity of the individual drum notes for the
selected drum instrument.


Reset: Sets all velocity levels to 100%

Random: The random parameter adds random variations to the set velocities.
This helps make your beats sound more natural.

Velocity level: Every set note for the selected instrument is displayed as a
column and can be edited. Multiple columns can be edited at once - see
Editing velocity values (view page 109).


110
www.magix.com
Editing velocity values
Hold down "Shift" and select any number of columns with the mouse.

The "Copy" button copies the selection to the clipboard. If you select this or that track
in another editor, then you can paste the notes there now from the clipboard. If the
target selection is larger than the contents of the clipboard, then it will be inserted
again. This lets you quickly add a short section throughout the complete length of the
pattern.
The three handles allow the velocity values to be edited together.

The middle handle increases or lowers the values together.

An object can be faded in or out with the handles to the left and right upper corners of
the object.

If you move the handles horizontally you can change the curve shape of the transition.
A single click in the velocity section cancels the selection again.
Note: A selection of velocity values matches the selection of corresponding notes in
the matrix editor.

Software Instruments 111

Synthesizer
In the lower section of BeatBox, you can set the sound for the selected drum
instrument.
The synthesis in BeatBox 2 consists of a combination of a simple drum sampler and a
synthesizer. There are three different synthesis models possible for the synthesizer:
"Phase Distortion Synth" (FM synthesis), "Filtered Noise", and "Physical Modeling".
The mixed signal of both components is then processed by a multi-mode filter. An
envelope curve ("envelope generator") time-dependently controls modulations of in
all components.


Preview drum istrument

Mix: Mix relationship between drum sampler and synthesizer.

Parameter controller: All six sound parameters for a drum sound can be directly
set and automated via the parameter controllers. The parameters in question
depend on the drum sound currently loaded.

Effects level: Each of BeatBox 2's drum instruments includes an effects unit which
is fed in after the actual sound synthesis and editing. The type of effect depends
on the selected drum sound.


112
www.magix.com
Loop Designer
The loop designer unites both stellar design elements of drum'n'bass style in a
"device": turned-up beats and rumbling bass lines. With the Loop Designer you can
create authentic drum'n'bass sounds without any specialized knowledge.
Tip: Drum'n'bass tracks usually have between 160 and 180 BPMs. The Drum&Bass
Machine can also be used for other music styles. e.g. for BigBeat (120 BPM) or
TripHop (80-90 BPM).
Loop Designer: overview

The top half of the synthesizer controls the rhythm section, the lower half - the bass
section. You can mute both sections using the M symbol on the left border. This way
you can, for example, turn off the bass section in order to take only the drum section
into the arrangement. Only the drum section will then be added to the mixdown file
when mixing down the arrangement. Next to this are the volume controls, which
control the volume of both sections.
You can preview and stop your drum'n'bass creations using the "play" and "stop"
buttons.
Additional buttons:

Loads a saved pattern with all settings.

Saves a pattern.

Undo for all settings made in all sections.

Makes random settings changes in both sections. You can change
settings later as you wish.

Software Instruments 113

Drum section (top half).
Here complex, authentic-sounding Jungle-Breakbeats can be put together easily. In
professional recording studios Jungle-breakbeats are made by chopping up arbitrary
drum loops and putting them back together in a different order. These laborious work
steps are significantly simplified by Loop Designer.
The new sequence is determined in the top row, the so-called "step" row. The grey
cells represent the individual sections ("counts") into which the loop is separated.
Pick a different note or playback by left-clicking a grey cell. Various notes will be
represented with a light bar which "grows" toward the top with each mouse click. This
way, each time you click on the grey cell, the bar expands by one step.

1 of 4: Play Drum Loop starting from the first note.


2 of 4: Play Drum Loop starting from the second note.

3 of 4: Play Drum Loop starting from the third note.

Full bar: Play Drum Loop starting from the fourth note.

Reverse icon: Play backwards from this position

Stop icon: Stop playback

The right mouse key deletes settings of a step bar and the Drum Loop is played in its
original order.

Pressing the double-arrow button generates a random step sequence.
You can change this rhythm as you like.


Clicking into the blue field in the left part of the drum
section opens a pop-up menu where you can pick the
sound of the Drum Loop. When you select another drum
loop it will load and be played in the way you
programmed it.

114
www.magix.com
Tip: You can also send a loop from Soundpool or a wave file to Loop Designer. To
do so, select the desired loop or file and drag it into the field while holding down the
mouse key ("drag & drop").
In the field under the "steps" row the sound of the loops is defined. The intensity of
the settings is determined with a control similar to a peakmeter. The higher the bar,
the stronger the influence on the loop is. With the help of the left mouse key, values
can be smoothly adjusted. "Volume" controls the loudness (full = loud, empty =
quiet), "filter" the filter strength (full = clear, empty = muffled). In the "Flam" row you
have the option to make the note repeat itself twice in quick succession. This is how
to program rolls and fill ins.
Using the top arrow buttons at the right edge you can load pre-defined pattern
settings. The originally set loop will not be changed. The two lower arrow buttons
offer presets in the form of standard curves for "volume" and "filter".

The "Filter type" controller selects the type of the filter sound:
"BP" stands for "bandpass", "LP" for "low pass" and "HP" for
"high pass".

Bass section (lower pane)
The bass section produces suitable bass lines.
• The first row of the "Notes" row, determines the order of the sounds i.e. the
series of notes. Select a cell with the left mouse click, where the lowermost
represents the lowest note and the topmost - the highest. A right mouse click
deletes a cell.
• In the "Octave" row you can specify the octave of the bass. The slide control
positions represent the various octave values. If the controller is down, a deep
sound is produced, if it is in the top position, you will get a high tone. If the
controller is in the middle, the pitch will be balanced.
Just like in the drum section, here you will also find arrow buttons on the right side for
opening pre-defined patterns and and a double-arrow button for setting arrows. The
filter can be set analogously to the drum section. The arrow button next to the filter
area select presets in the form of standard curves.
You can determine the bass sound in the blue selection field at the left side. You can
drag loops and WAV sounds into the field using drag & drop just like in the drum
section.
Additionally, there are two slide controllers for sound changes to the right:

Software Instruments 115


The "Vibrato" slider makes the bass tone's pitch change. When
the control is to the far right, the sound vibrates more, if it's to
the far left pitch isn't changed at all.

The slider "Decay" determines how long should it take to for the
sound to subside. Set to the far right the sound is very fast
(about 1 / 4 of a second), on the far left the sound lasts longer.

LiViD - Little Virtual Drummer
MAGIX LiViD helps you to turn your ideas into songs. Enter a few basic details and
LiViD will play a full drum track, complete with intro, verses, choruses, fills, bridges
etc.; the entire song structure is laid out for your convenience. Brilliant stereo drum
samples recorded by professional studio musicians and a freely adjustable
“Humanize“ function will create an authentic drum feel with perfect sound quality.
LiViD features four styles (pop, rock, funk, latin), each of which is subdivided into four
further substyles, as well as six song sections for each substyle (intro, verse, bridge,
chorus, outro, fill-in).

Scramble: A random sequence of four one-bar patterns is generated internally for
each style/substyle/song section. “Scramble” generates a new pattern order.
Shuffle: Shifts the second and fourth 16th note of a beat back by a freely definable
amount (100% = triplet rhythm).

116
www.magix.com
Humanize: Randomly shifts all events backwards or forwards, or leaves them
unaffected. Note: these shifts are very subtle and not always immediately perceptible!
Snare: Sets the snare stick style to “normal”, “side stick” (stick hits the rim while
resting on the skin) or “rim shot” (sticks hits the rim and skin simultaneously).
Exception: the snare’s quietest velocity level ( the "ghost notes") is always “normal”.
Hi-hat: Sets the hi-hat sound to “soft” (fully closed) or to “hard” (half-open).
Exception: completely opened hi-hat (pop, type1, verse).
Ride: Sets the ride cymbal sound to “ride” (cymbal is hit on the rim) or “ride bell”
(cymbal is hit on the bell at the center).
Robota
The Robota is a four-part drum computer with virtual analog and sample-based sound
production. Virtual analog sound production means that the sounds are synthesized
in real-time, i.e. produced with a synthesizer to recreate the typical analog sounds of
classical drum computers, such as the Roland Tr-808 and Tr-909, or more recent
devices such as the Korg Electribe or the Jomox x-cousin. Sample sound production
uses drum sound recordings (or even other recordings) as the basis for sound
production.
After selecting the elementary sound production technique, the sounds of each of the
4 parts (or instruments) can be edited using modulators.
The step sequencer programmed with incident lighting helps Robota to play. 4 beats
in sixteenths (or 2 beats in thirty-seconds) are processed as a loop. At each beat
position, the playing positions can be set by clicking a button. In "Event" mode, the
instruments are distributed within the beat pattern. In "Snapshot" mode you can
adjust additional instrument sound settings.
Sound synthesis
The four instruments of the Robota are built identically. Each instrument can create all
kinds of drum sounds – from hissing hi-hats to phat bass drums.
During elementary sound production, you can choose between an oscillator with
selectable wave shapes (sine, triangle or saw tooth) or a sample. In addition, you can
add a noise generator can be added. The oscillator has a pitch envelope (pitch env.)
and a volume envelope (attack/decay). It can also be frequency and ring-modulated.
The depth of the modulation can be controlled via an envelope parameter (Fm/rng
dcy). There’s also a “Lo-fi” section consisting of distortion (Rectify), bit rate reduction
(Crush) and sampling rate reduction (down sample).
Temporal control via an envelope (lofi dcy) will get the best out of the lo-fi effects. A
multi-mode filter (low-pass/band-pass filter/high-pass) with 12/24 dB steep-side. A
comb filter can be inserted. The filter frequency can be likewise modulated via an

Software Instruments 117

envelope. For extra pressure, an adjustable compressor (compressor, comp resp) is
included, as well as tube amplifier simulation (tube).
Parameter (1): To simplify matters, not all parameters
can be changed on a sound - only those that are
meaningful for the selected drum sound may be
changed (snare, kick, high etc.). There are four selected
variable parameters coordinated exactly with the
selected preset sound.
Oscillator waveform (2): The fundamental waveform of
the Oscillators is selected here. You can choose from
sinus/triangle/sawtooth/sample. If you have selected
"Smpl" you can use the rotary knob to select a sample,
i.e. a previously recorded drum sound. These samples
are saved in the folder /synth/robota/samples/. If
select custom samples, they will appear in the selection
list.
(3): For each part you can regulate: Filter Cutoff,
Resonance, Tube, Volume and Panorama (view page
118).


With select choose the instrument for editing in the step sequencer.

“M” mutes the instrument, “S” makes it solo

The loudspeaker button allows you to hear a preview.
Master Section
Volume regulates the total volume of the Robota. Distortion adds an adjustable tube
distortion to make the sound “dirtier” and more powerful. The peak meter helps
control the output level – when it enters the red area, reduce the total volume.

118
www.magix.com
Schematic illustration of the Robota synthesis

Here is a detailed circuit diagram of a Robota voice with a description of all control
parameters.
Pitch envelope (pitch env)
Controls the pitch envelope level.
Tune
Tunes the instrument.

Software Instruments 119

Oscillator shape (osc shape)
The shaper adds additional frequency shares to the basic sound of the oscillator by
artificially reshaping the wave shape. A sine wave (shape = 0) can be reshaped up to
a square curve (shape = max).
Oscillator waveform
The fundamental waveform of the oscillators is selected here. You can choose from
sine/triangle/sawtooth/sample. If "Sample" is selected, you can use the controller to
select a sample, i.e. a previously recorded drum sound. These samples are saved in
the folder /Synth/robota/samples/. If you select custom samples, they will appear in
the selection list. If you are playing your own samples, they will appear in the selection
list.
Noise
Adjust the ratio between the oscillator sound and the noise generator.
Attack
Adjusts the attack time. The greater the set value, the softer the attack of the sound.
The attack rate is also applied to the lo-fi and filter envelope curves.
Decay
Adjusts the decay curve. The greater the value, the slower the instrument will decay.
FM/Ring modulation frequency (Fm/rng frq)
The fundamental frequency of the frequency or ring modulation.
FM level (fm lvl)
At a low frequency FM first adds vibration to the sound, at high frequencies and low
levels it creates bell-like sounds, as the level increases metal sounds, and finally noise.
Ring modulation level (rng lvl)
Ring modulation creates typical auxiliary frequencies.
FM/Ring modulation decay (Fm/rng dcy)
Time constant of FM/ring modulation by-product. Only the beginning of the drum
sound is affected by the modulation.
Rectify
Distorts the audio signal.
Crush
Bit rate reduction. Digital artifacts become audible with higher settings.
Down sample (dwnsmple)
Sample rate reduction. Ideal for creating the "old school sound" of older digital drum
machines. As it is increased, the result becomes darker.
Lo-fi decay (lofi dcy)

120
www.magix.com
Time constant of the by-product of the three lo-fi effects which makes the sound
"dirty". Only the beginning of the drum sound of the lo-fi effects is affected if the
decay is low. For instance, this makes the kick of a kick drum sound more interesting.
Filter modes (flt mode)
Filter mode: High cut – sound portions above the cut-off frequency are filtered out.
Band pass (BP) – Sound portions above and below the cut-off frequency are filtered
out. Low cut - All sound portions below the cut-off frequency are filtered out. This
mode is set as a preset and can not be changed.
Filter frequency (flt freq)
The cut-off frequency of the filter.
Filter resonance (flt reso)
Filter resonance which increases the sound portions at the cut-off frequency of the
filter. If the resonance is high, the filter itself can also be used as an oscillator.
Filter modulation -/+ (flt mod -+)
Regulates how much and in which direction the filter envelope curve moves the filter
frequency in which direction.
Filter-Modulation decay (flt mod dcy)
Decay time of the filter curve. Smaller values with high resonance create a "zapping"
sound of the filter, greater values create the typical sweep sound.
Filter modulation velocity (flt mod vel)
Specifies how much the filter modulation depth depends on the velocity. If this value
is increased, louder beats will generate higher filter curves than quieter ones.
24 dB
The filter can operate with a slope of 12 dB or 24 dB. This mode is set as a preset and
cannot be changed.
Comb filter (comb filt on)
You can activate a comb filter, a feedback delay that creates resonance-like sounds
comparable to a plucked string. The delay time and feedback levels are permanently
linked fo the filter parameters (frequency and resonance). This comb filter is set as a
preset and can not be changed.
Compressor
Controls the compressor strength. This lets you increase the "power" of the drum
sound.
Compressor response (comp resp)
Controls the compressor time. The lower the value, the faster the compressor follows
the volume.
Tube

Software Instruments 121

Controls the level of the tube amp simulation. It "saturates" the output signal of the
voice and adds warmth to the sound if the settings are moderate. Increasing the
settings makes the sound "dirtier".
Volume/Pan
Controls the volume and panorama position of the drum instruments.
Sequencer

Incident lighting is used to control the drum patterns just like in all classical drum
computers and groove boxes. The step sequencer consists of 16 individual step
buttons with LEDs corresponding to the appropriate partitioning of a beat:
16ths or 32nds (a half beat is in each case displayed). A button lights up to indicate
the releasing of the instrument at this point in the beat (= step).
A left click turns on the step, a further left click deletes the step again.

A pattern can be a maximum of 4 beats long. The length can be modified
using the fader on the button bar.

The beat to be edited can be selected with the applicable “edit” button. The “Follow”
button specifies whether the step of a beat is in time.
"1 > 2-4" auto draw: If more than 1 beat is activated as the loop length, the "Auto
draw" mode ensures that the drum note set in the first beat is set automatically for
the following beats. This makes it very simple to produce a continuous beat from a
loop length of 4 beats. Notes set in the rear beats are not affected by auto draw.
How to program a drum pattern:
• Select the pattern length with the fader.

• Select “Event” mode.

• If you edit during playback, turn off “Follow”. Select the beat with the “Edit”
buttons.


• Use “Select” to choose an instrument to edit.

122
www.magix.com

• Use the “Clear bar” button to delete all steps in the selected
instrument.


• Turn on the appropriate step buttons, and use the “Velocity”
controller to adjust the beat velocity.

• Repeat the procedure with the other instruments
Snapshots
In addition, you can automate programming of the editable sound parameter of a
drum sound via so-called "snapshots". You can thereby save the sound parameters of
a drum instrument on the step buttons of the sequencers.
Automating the drum instrument with snapshots.:

• Set the edit mode to “Snap”.
• If you edit during playback, turn off “Follow”. Select the beat with the “Edit”
buttons.
• Select an instrument and edit the sound. You can control the sound of an
instrument even when playback has stopped by using the loudspeaker button.
• Save the sound as a snapshot to one of the step buttons.
• Change the sound of an instrument and save the settings to other step button
Warning: The parameters are not changed abruptly but are faded internally instead,
in order to avoid crackling. If two snapshots with extreme parameter differences are
too close together, the drum sounds will sound differently when the pattern is
played.
• Using the arrow keys, you can jump between the individual
snapshots during stopped playback.
• Press “on” to activate snapshot automation.
Groove Control
The secret behind “groove” beats lies in delay. That is, individual beats are either
anticipated or delayed according to patterns. For example house beats use the
“shuffle” whereby straight 1/16s are delayed at certain times.


Software Instruments 123

In the Robota there are groove velocity and groove swing presets. Groove velocity
presets contain for each step of a beat a certain offset to increase or reduce the
original beat velocity. Groove swing presets contain for each step a time alignment
that is either anticipated or delayed. The result is a livelier-sounding sequence. The
strength of the effect can be adjusted with the % regulator.
Setups, drum kits, presets, and patterns

A single instrument sound is saved as a
preset.

Presets containing all four instruments
are saved as drum kits.

All note information plus the snapshots
are saved as a pattern.

Together (drum kit + pattern) they are
know as a setup.
Load/Save
Presets, drum kits, patterns and setups can be selected with the continuous rotary
regulators next to the display area. For storing, click on the “Save” button. Then
specify a new name in the input field. To store, press “Enter”.
Note: A drum kit stores only the names of the presets, not the actual parameters. If
you want to store your own drum sounds that were created by changing existing
presets, you must first store them as new presets and then as a new drum kit! The
same applies to the setups, which contain only the pattern and drum kit names.
If necessary, always store in this order: preset -> drum kit -> pattern -> setup. This
applies only when creating your own “templates”. If you store your arrangement
normally, the complete current status (synthesizer + sequencer) of the Robota is
always stored and correctly loaded later with the arrangement.

124
www.magix.com
Atmos
Atmos is a synthesizer which can be used to easily create realistic nature sounds in
no time. From thunder and lightning to animal sounds and traffic noise, Atmos helps
you design natural-sounding atmospheric noises for your projects.

• In the upper border window, select the top category "Scenario". You can select a
desired nature sounds category (for example, "Thunder and Lightning").
• In the middle of the window, a collection of control elements appears for
designing the desired "Ambience". Each element has its own description (e.g.
"Thunder") and two faders, i.e. "Volume" and "Intensity". The "volume" control
adjusts the loudness portion of the element. The "Intensity" fader controls the
behavior of the sound, depending on controller element. For example, with
"Thunder", you can set how often thunder and lightning should sound; with
"Rain", the strength of the rain can be regulated (if moved to the far left, light rain
can be heard, while if moved to the far right, a downpour with loud splashing
noises is audible).
• At the bottom right border you will find a master volume fader with which the
master volume of the synthesizer can be set. Furthermore, the "Randomize"
setting is also located here. This way you can change the settings of the control
elements by yourself.
Synthesizer plug-ins
MAGIX Music Maker 2013 includes Vita and the Revolta, two VST plug-in-based
software synthesizers (see below). Compared with other synthesizers that are
addressed via synth objects, these feature several differences:
• Generally, VST instrument plug-ins (VSTi) do not feature sequencers of their
own and are controlled via MIDI objects.

Software Instruments 125

• VST instruments are always loaded onto a certain track, and all MIDI objects on
this track control this VST instrument. The MIDI objects cannot be moved
between tracks freely like synth objects.
• Effects may be only applied on the track level.
Nevertheless, these are much more easier to manipulate in MAGIX Music Maker
2013 due to MIDI control, and sequences may also be recorded (view page 86) using
MIDI keyboard.
What are VST and DirectX plug-ins?
A plug-in is an independent program section which can be added to another program,
to broaden its range of functions. Various standards were developed for including
plug-ins. "VST" and "DirectX" have become the most widely used.
"VST" stands for "Virtual Studio Technology". VST plug-ins offer an elegant way of
copying and making virtual devices that are normally used in recording studios.
"DirectX" is a Microsoft standard for plug-ins similar to VST plug-ins.
The advantages:
• Purchasing expensive synthesizers or effect devices is no longer necessary.
• An expensive sound card is no longer necessary for high-quality recordings from
external devices.
• VST instruments and VST/DirectX effects provided by lots of third party
providers are better value or are even made available as freeware.
The disadvantages: Each of these plug-ins uses up processor power. The more a plug-
in is used, the faster your computer should be. The required processing power is, of
course, also dependent on the size, state, and complexity of the plug-in.
Using VST instruments
VST instruments are loaded via the Media Pool. These appear in the area below the
"Synthesizer" setting (synthesizer track).
If you have just freshly installed MAGIX Music Maker 2013, then you will not see any
additional synthesizers here at first (other than those that were included). You will
have to enter the folder first in which Music Maker should look for VST instruments.
VST plug-ins may be installed in any folder on your hard drive.
Click "Add" (on the right edge of the Media Pool) and find the VST folder. If you use
other programs with VST plug-ins or if you have already created a folder for your VST
plug-ins, you can enter the folder here. You can add another extra folder at any time
in case you you have installed additional plug-ins in another folder; plug-ins that have
already been "identified" will always be located regardless of the path set. Pressing
OK causes Music Maker to scan the folder for usable plug-ins that are available in the
Media Pool.

126
www.magix.com

Vita and Revolta 2 (Premium version only) feature their own icon in the
Media Pool; all other VST instruments use a standard icon. To use VST
instruments, drag the VSTi Synth into a free track in the arranger.
A preset MIDI object will appear in the track and the MIDI Editor will open.
You can open Vita and Revolta 2 (Premium version only) directly by selecting
one of their preset sounds in the instrument menu of the track box. At the very
bottom in the menu, a sub-menu is provided for software instruments that
lists the other VST instruments.

To use the MIDI objects and the MIDI Editor, please read the chapter MIDI Objects
(view page 80).
VST Plug-in Editor
The VST Plug-in Editor can be opened by right-clicking on the instrument's name in
the MIDI Editor, via the corresponding plug-in slot in the Mixer, or via the "VST
Instruments Editor" entry in the instrument list.
The Instrument Editor has two views, the so-called "GUI" of the plug-in (Graphical
User Interface) and the parameter view. This is either automatically activated when
the VST plug-in does not have its own GUI or can be used if the GUI of the plug-in is
too unclear or takes up too much space on the screen. The parameter view displays
the eight parameters of the plug-in as sliders. In the File menu you can change
between these views (plug-in dialog/plug-in parameter).
Load/save patch/bank: The instrument settings can be saved and loaded in the
patch formats typical for VST plug-ins (*.fxp) and bank formats (*.fxb).
Random parameters: This function can be an important source of inspiration.
However, before using it please save the current preset you've just created as this
feature does not ask before it is applied.
Menu program: Here you can select the presets integrated into the plug-in or loaded
via the File menu.
MAGIX Vita
MAGIX Vita Synthesizer specializes on realistic playback of "real" instruments for
which it uses sampling technology. This means that short samples of real instruments
in different pitches, playing techniques and volumes are used, combined, and played
again at the correct pitch.

Software Instruments 127

The Vita interface

1. Layer selection/Peak meter: The Vita sounds, also known as layers, can be selected
here using the arrows. Right-clicking on the display opens the layer menu.
2. Main parameter: Here the volume, panorama position, pitch characteristics
("transpose") and the fundamental frequency ("master tune") can be set.
3. AMP: This is the volume envelope. With this you can control the timing of a
sound's volume. A(ttack) stands for the volume increase at the start, D(ecay) for the
length of time the decrease in volume takes on a section set with S(ustain) at the
maximum volume. R(elease) is the length of time it takes for the sound to fade out.

4. FILTER: Here you can switch on a filter which influences the sound. With FILTER
TYPE you can select the kind of filter you want to use. Cutoff controls the filter
frequency and "Resonance" controls the strength of the emphasized filter frequency.
"Velocity" indicates how much the velocity influences the filter frequency, using

128
www.magix.com
"Gain" you can balance the volume. The filter envelope (ADSR slider) influences the
filter frequency depending on the time.
5. DELAY: Here you can switch on an echo effect. "Time" controls the delay time and
"Level" controls the strength of the echo sound.
6. REVERB: Here you can switch on a reverb effect. "Time" controls the delay time
and "Level" controls the strength of the echo sound.
7. TUBE DISTORTION: This is a tube distortion effect like those found in guitar
amplifiers. This is normally used for electric guitars but you can also get creative and
use it for other things. "Drive" controls the strength of the distortion. "High-cut" and
"Low-cut" filter out the high and low frequencies.
8. VALUE DISPLAY: This always displays the exact values of the parameter that was
just adjusted.
9. DYNAMIC RANGE: Usually the relationship between the created volume and the
MIDI velocity is proportional. You can compensate for the fact that some MIDI
keyboards need to be pressed forcefully to produce loud sounds (or conversely
produce loud sounds with a soft touch) using the "MIDI Input Curve". Using
"Dynamic and "Dynamic curve" you can manipulate the dynamics of a sound, i.e. the
relationship between the loudest and quietest sounds.
10. Voices: Here you can control the number of voices played simultaneously. If notes
are no longer played, as is the case in some fast passages, you can increase the
number of voices at the expense of performance.
11. Keyboard: Here you can preview the Vita sounds. This only works during playback
or recording. 12. lets you hide the keyboard.
Additional Vita Solo Instruments
Additional software included in MAGIX Music Maker 2013 such as the Rock Drums
or String Ensemble are sampler, whose sounds are prerecorded. The advantage to the
virtual synthesizers such as Robota is that the sounds don't have to be recalculated
each time, which frees up a lot of computation capacity. They are "simply" called up,
instead of being created anew. The disadvantage, however, is that the finished sounds
don't sound as "professional" as those produced with virtual "sound magic".
The basic controls are identical for all synthesizers.


Software Instruments 129

One click on the arrow symbol opens a fold-out menu where you can determine the
general sound of the instrument. If "ECO" appears in the description, this refers to
especially performance-improving settings which may not sound so "smooth". In
addition, you can also save your settings and add them to a favorites list for later use.

You can control the overall loudness of the instrument.

You can turn the instrument keyboard on or off with this controller.
Because these samplers are enhanced for each instrument by tuned effects, the rest
of controls function analogously to the already familiar synthesizers such as Vita. If
you would like to know which result certain effects have, you will find explanations in
the Essential FX (view page 149), Vintage Effects (view page 156), Reverb (view page
142) and Distorsion & Filter (view page 145) chapters.
Additional information is also available in the Synthesizer plug-ins (view page 124)
chapter.
Articulation
Some Vita Solo Instruments have a special feature: In a bass octave (on the keyboard
(C0-H0), there are special notes, which let you control the playing style
(articulation). An alternative sample set is loaded, which lets the bass sound even
more realistic using various playing styles such as note bending and flageolet.
Articulation is switched on and continues until normal articulation is switched on
again through the corresponding note (C0).

130
www.magix.com

On the keyboard at the bottom of the synthesizer interface are the buttons to switch
articulation, displayed in different colors. In the MIDI Editor appearing above, you can
watch a practical application of articulation. The notes on 1:4 and 4:1 will be played
back with varying articulation. Before the next "right" note, normal articulation will be
switched on again through C0.
Automation of Vita and Vita Solo instruments
In MAGIX Music Maker 2013 it is possible to automate Vita Solo instruments. This
allows you to change a specific value during playback using an automation curve
automatically. Below we describe how to work using an automation curve.
1. Right-click on an effect knob. This opens a context menu where you can select a
MIDI controller number for the automation using "midi ctrl #". A few standard
controller settings are preset, e.g. 7 for volume, 10 for panorama, 91 for reverb.


Software Instruments 131

2. Open the MIDI Editor (Y key) and switch into the "Velocity/Controller Editor".

3. At the bottom right you can now select the pre-selected controller number in the
MIDI controller selection field.

4. You can now draw the desired automation curve.
Additional information can be found in the Controller Editor - Select and edit events
(view page 90).
Tip: If you are using an external controller, you can also use it to control and
automate values. To do so, select "Learn MIDI" in the Vita Solo Instruments context
menu. Also read the Using external equipment (view page 81) chapter.

132
www.magix.com
Audio effects
MAGIX Music Maker 2013 offers you a multitude of infinitely variable and intuitively
adjustable audio effects.
Effects
The effects in MAGIX Music Maker 2013 allow the sound spectrum of all of the audio
objects and synthesizers to be thoroughly manipulated. Since most effects operate in
real time, the effects offer ideal room for experimenting with creative sound design.
Real-time effects
Real-time effects are calculated the first time the object is played back. The audio file
(original material) itself remains unaffected. The effect is recalculated in real time
each time it is played back. The object always retains its original status when real-
time effects are applied.
To change a real-time effect, open the effects rack or the effect's settings dialog and
drag the respective control elements; the changes will be audible immediately.
The lower edge of an audio object in the arranger lists all currently active object
effects with abbreviations.

Effect devices controls
Some effect options open a graphic window, which has the appearance of the studio
effect device that it simulates (such as the "Echo/reverb" or "Timestretching" effect
menus).
These virtual effect devices are controlled either with common sliders, knobs and
buttons or alternatively with graphic sensor fields.

Sensor fields: Sensor fields can be controlled intuitively with mouse
movements, with the graphic and the corresponding effect setting
changing in relation to each other.


Power switch: Every effect device in the rack may be switched on or off
separately. This button allows you to directly compare the neutral, unedited
sound of the audio object with the effect setting you have chosen.

Audio effects 133


Reset: Every effect has a reset button that restores the effect device’s initial
default. In this state, the effect is not calculated into the sound, and the
effect is not rendered.

Preset selection list: Each effect device has a selection of
proven presets which can be selected from a drop-down
menu.


A/B: The A/B button compares two settings with each other. If you have
selected a preset for the effect and make manual changes to it later, you can
compare the original preset sound with the new settings by using the A/B
button.
Note: The displayed graphics serve only examples and can differ from device to
device.
Non real-time effects
A few audio effects are not calculated in real time; instead, after the settings dialog is
closed, copies of the audio material are added for calculating the effect. This way, no
additional calculations will be required during playback.
To change these effects, use the undo function.
The following effects don't work in real time: Freely-drawn filters, gater, reverse, invert
phase.
Using audio effects
Audio effects can be added at different positions in the arrangement, at object level, in
a complete track, or in the master (i.e. everything you can hear).
Audio object effects
Object effects do not affect the entire arranger track, but rather individual objects. The
advantage to this is that effects which are only required at a specific point in the
arrangement only use up processing power at that particular point.
There are several ways to apply audio effects to individual audio objects:
1. Drag & drop: In the Media Pool setting "templates", the following folders are
visible "Audio FX", "Vintage FX". These contain presets for the most important
effects. These presets have a preview function and can be dragged & dropped
on an audio object in the arranger.
2. Right clicking on an audio object or via the "Effects -> Audio" menu opens
individual audio effects via a menu command.

134
www.magix.com
3. Double clicking on an audio object opens the audio effects rack (view page
136). The most important effects are compiled into one dialog and some
special functions are still available, as is the option of saving all of the effects
settings.
Track effects
Besides the object audio effects, a separate track effects rack with equalizer,
reverb/echo, compressor as well as the Vintage Effects Suite plug-ins can be used.
There is also a separate 6-channel parametric equalizer (view page
139) that may be opened via the small EQ button beside the panorama
controller.
The plug-ins are loaded via the plug-in slot.

You can open the track audio effects rack with the FX button.
A bright blue track effects button signifies that effects are active in the track.
The track effects can also be applied without having to open the mixer.

The arranger's trackbox (view page 31) also features the track FX
menu. In it, you will find presets for track effects (view page 134)
sorted according to the instrument type.
Track effects always apply to all audio objects of a track. In comparison to applying an
effect to each object individually, this saves storage space. The effect itself works the
same way as object effects.
Master effects
Master effects influence the mixed sum of all audio tracks. For this purpose a Master
Audio Effects Rack and further plug-ins are installed in the Mixer window. Also
included: the special MAGIX Mastering Suite for perfect sound.
Effect curves
Many effects can be adjusted using the effect curves for a more dynamic application
of the effect. This means that certain effect settings can be changed during playback.
The effect curves are available as object curves and track curves. Object curves are
always object-related, i.e. they only apply to one object and are moved or copied
together with the object. The track curves are saved in the track and affect all of the
objects the track.
To learn more about editing effect curves you can refer to the chapter „Effect curves“.

Audio effects 135

Using plug-in effects
For introductory information about plug-ins, please read the section Synthesizer
Plug-ins (view page 124) in the "Synthesizers" chapter!
At different positions in MAGIX Music Maker 2013, you can also utilize effects from
third-party developers in the VST or DirectX format. Several of the included effects
(EssentialFX, Vintage FX Suite, Vandal SE) are also applied as plug-ins.
Track effects
Track effects can be selected and specified in the Mixer. They refer to all objects in
the corresponding track.
Tip: An effect set in the Mixer uses up processing power at every playback position
in the arrangement. Consider whether or not it would be enough simply to use an
effect as an object effect.

Two slots for track effects are located in the channel strip of the mixer
for the corresponding track as well as in the FX tracks (view page 181).
If you click on the small triangle here, MAGIX Music Maker 2013 compiles a list of
available effects. Now you can select any effect from the list.
The list consists of multiple subfolders: Direct X plug-ins, VST plug-ins, and the
MAGIX plug-ins folder for the included plug-ins Vintage Effects Suite (view page
156), Essential FX Suite, and Vandal SE.
Select "No effect" to remove a plug-in from the slot. Left clicking temporarily disables
the plug-in. Active plug-ins are displayed in light blue. Right clicking on the slot opens
the settings dialog of the plug-in.
Object Effects
The audio effects rack can be opened by double-clicking an audio object.

The module at the very bottom enables two plug-in
effects to be used. This functions just like the mixer's
plug-in slots:
1. Click on the box.
2. Select the effect you want.
3. Adjust the effect settings in the dialog.

136
www.magix.com
The effect relates to the selected object (in contrast to track effects)and only needs
computing power when the object is played.
Master Effects
In the master channel you can find two slots for selecting a master effect. Often, for
example, compressors are used in the master so as to give the whole signal a more
booming and louder sound.Effects selection here is the same as by the track effects:
1. Click on the box
2. Wait until the list of available effects is compiled
3. Select effect and configure
Object and master effects rack
The audio effects rack for objects can be opened by double-clicking the audio object.
The audio effects rack for the individual tracks or for the entire sound ("master
effect") can be opened using the FX buttons in the mixer window ("M" key).
In addition to the most important effects like the 10-band equalizer, reverb/delay,
compressor, time processor (objects only), filter and stereo enhancer (track only), the
following features are also available:
Object Volume

Here you can set the master level for the selected object. With some effect
combinations undesired distortion may appear as many effects increase frequency
ranges. In this case, you can reduce the master volume.

The faders for each stereo channel are usually moved together.
If you deactivate the left button, the object can be made into stereo panorama by
separate volume controlling for left and right.
Load/Save
The current settings for each applied effects device in the rack can be saved as an
effect preset, e.g. so that it can be used for other objects. Only the rack effects that
were used will be saved and loaded during this process. This means that effects
presets can also be combined.
This function is not yet available for the track effects rack.

Audio effects 137

Effects plug-ins

If external plug-ins are installed on your
computer, then you can activate them via the
button to the bottom right. These buttons
also open the effects in the Vintage Effects
Suite (view page 156).
For more information about plug-ins, please read the chapter Using VST/DirectX
effects (view page 135).
Apply (destructive editing)
With "Apply" the current setting of an effect or of an entire effect rack can be
"calculated into" the audio object.
This has the advantage that no more processing power will be required for the effect.
The object will be replaced by a new audio file which contains the sound of the object
with the effect. This will then only be played – processor-heavy "realtime" effect
calculation is no longer required.
The disadvantage: Changing the effect settings is not a simple any more. You can
undo these "destructive" changes straight after using the Undo function in the Edit
menu (like every editing operation in MAGIX Music Maker 2013). After saving the
project this is no longer possible.
In the master effects rack there are no Apply buttons. Instead, the function can be
found in the Edit menu (Audio Mixdown (view page 214))
Play object/Play arrangement

To the bottom right of the Audio FX Rack you will find two
playback buttons which either play the selected object or the
entire range. This lets you preview all effect settings in realtime.

Equalizer

The 10-band equalizer subdivides the frequency spectrum into ten areas ('bands') and
equips them with separate volume controls. This way it is possible to create many
impressive effects, from a simple boosting of the bass to complete elimination of a
certain range of frequencies. Note: If low frequencies are boosted too much, the

138
www.magix.com
overall sound level is heavily increased which may lead to distortion. In this event,
adjust the overall volume downward by using the 'master volume' control situated at
the bottom center of the effect rack.
Slider control: Each of the ten frequency ranges can be separately boosted or turned
down with the ten volume controls.
Link bands: Using this button randomly combines the frequency ranges with each
other in to avoid artificial-sounding overemphasis of an individual frequency range.
Touch screen (right EQ section): This is the 'sensor field' of the EQ. Here you can
draw any type of curve with the mouse. This will be immediately translated into a
corresponding control setting on the left side of the EQ.
Compressor

The compressor is an automated dynamic volume control. It limits overall dynamics,
maintains the volume of loud passages so they stay loud, and increases the volume of
low passages. A compressor can be put to good use for e. g bass recordings and
vocals, but also as a master effect in the mixer for subsequent editing of the overall
sound.
Processing is carried out using a "look-ahead" method, similar to high-quality studio
appliances. There are no peak overmodulations or other artifacts as the algorithm can
never be 'surprised' by sudden level peaks.
Ratio: This parameter controls the compression level.
Threshold: This sets the volume threshold below and above which compression is
applied.
Attack: Sets the algorithm's reaction time to increasing sound levels. Short attack
times can create an undesirable "pumping" sound, as the volume is quickly reduced or
increased correspondingly.
Release: Sets the algorithm's reaction time to falling sound levels.
Gain: The gain controller amplifies the compressed signal.

Audio effects 139

6 Band Equalizer
The parametric equalizer has six filter bands that you can use to shape the sound of
the music track. Each band is a filter with a typical "bell shape". Within a certain
frequency range around an adjustable middle frequency you can increase or reduce
the signal level gain. The width of this frequency range is called bandwidth. The
bandwidth is defined by the Q value. The higher the Q value, the narrower and
steeper the filter curve.
You can influence the basic sound of the mix by increasing and decreasing the
broadband so as to give it more "depth" (lower center 200-600 Hz) or more "air"
(Highs 10Khz). You can also decrease the narrowband width (high Q-value) in the
frequency response to remove disruptive frequencies.

Sensor field: The sensor field displays the resulting
frequency response of the equalizer´. The frequency
is displayed horizontally and the increase or decrease
of the respective frequency is displayed vertically.
The blue bullets 1-6 symbolize the six frequency bands. You can move them around
with the mouse until you find the frequency response you want.

You can control the output level of the equalizer with the Peak Meter . With the
Master Gain Controller beside it you can offset the level changes resulting from the
EQ adjustments.

140
www.magix.com
You can access additional settings for each frequency band by clicking on the bullets.

You can use the knobs to set the values for each band. There is also a numeric field
for each parameter where values can be entered.
Gain: This controller allows you to raise or lower the filter. Setting the controller to 0
deactivates the filter so it does not use any CPU power.
Freq: The center frequency of the individual filters can be set between 10 Hz and 24
kHz with the frequency controller. Freely choosing the frequency enables multiple
filters to be set to the same frequency in order to have a greater effect.
Q (Bandwidth): Here you can set the bandwidth of the individual filters to between 10
Hz and 10 kHz.
Bands 1 and 6 are special: Their Filter Curves can be edited in three different modes.
The four editing points in the graphic have different functions in each mode.

Peaking: Here the effect curve is brought closer to the working point (which
represents the peak of the curve) from both sides simultaneously.

Shelving (Basic setting): Here the working point displays the beginning of the
filter curve. From this point on there is a gentle increase or decrease in the
frequency.

High or Low Pass:In Band 1 the working point displays the frequency which is
filtered out of particularly high or low frequencies.

Enhancer
The Enhancer enables the justification of the audio material in the stereo panorama to
be adjusted. If the stereo recordings sound unfocused and undifferentiated, an
extension of the stereo base-width can often provide better transparency.

Audio effects 141

Use the maximize function to move the echo and improve the stereo picture, for
example, into the foreground.

Volume controller: Adjusts the volume of every single channel to adjust the complete
panorama. The reduction of left and right levels is displayed under the control
buttons.
Pan-direction: Use this controller to move the sound source from the middle into
stereo panorama. The signals at the outer edges of the sound picture remain
unchanged.
Multiband: This option switches from "Stereo FX" to "Multiband" mode. Stereo
editing only applies to the middle frequency, the bass and highs remain unchanged.
Bandwidth/maximize sensor field: Adjusts the base width between mono (extreme
left), unchanged base width (normal stereo), and maximum base width (wide,
extreme right). Raising the bandwidth (values over 100) diminishes the mono
compatibility. This means that recordings edited this way sound hollow when listened
to in mono.
Maximize strengthens the spatial component of the recording, which also increases
the stereo transparency without influencing the mono compatibility.
Stereo meter (correlation gauge): This provides a graphical display of the phase
relation of the audio signal. You can use it to review the orientation of the signal in the
stereo balance and the effect of the stereo enhancer. To maintain mono-compatibility,
the "cloud" shown should always be higher than it is wide.
Invert phase
This function moves the object to the rear loudspeakers of a dolby surround system.
Quite an impressive effect for the audio tracks of video productions.

142
www.magix.com
Reverb

The reverb effect device offers newly developed and very realistic reverb algorithms
to add more room depth to your recording.
Reverb is probably the most important but also the most difficult effect to generate.
Fundamentals
Our everyday experience shows that not every room matches every instrument. Thus
we have designed “virtual” rooms. However, it still remains important to find the
correct parameters. Here are some examples of parameters that are decisive for the
sound impression in real and virtual rooms:
• Size of room: The larger a room, the longer the sound travels between walls or
objects. Our brain “calculates” the size from the time difference. The size
impression is mainly determined from so-called first reflections and the discreet
echo. We don’t notice a (diffused) reverb.
• The reverberation time is mainly influenced by the composition of the walls,
ceilings and floors. This reverb time is highly frequency-dependent. For instance,
the highs and mids are dampened more in rooms with curtains, carpets, furniture
and some corners than in an empty and tiled room.
• The density of the reflection: The sequence of the first reflection is particularly
important. A room with many individually recognizable echoes feels alive,
especially if they are quite far apart.
• The Diffusion: Simple reverb machines do not take into account that reflections
become more and more complex as they develop. They blur the first echoes at
the beginning, which sounds artificial and “two-dimensional” for many signals.
Our reverb effect works like a real room instead where individual echoes can still
be heard at the beginning of the reverb but then reflect amongst each other more
and more until they disappear in the signal sustain as a so-called “diffused hiss”.
The 24 presets include many rooms that were designed for certain instruments and
applications and whose internal parameters have been optimized for these
applications. However, you can influence most of the characteristics of the room
using the provided sliders.
In addition to the rooms we have modeled two device types in the reverb effect that
allow you to create an artificial reverb for a longer time: Plate Reverb and Spring
Reverb.

Audio effects 143

Plate Reverb: A plate reverb consists of a large metal plate (often 0.5 to 1m2 thick or
more), that is put into motion by a magnet and coil system (similar to a loudspeaker).
On the reverb plate so-called “taps” are positioned at different locations. These are
pick-ups comparable to those on a guitar. Reverb plates have a very dense sound
(high diffusion); no direct echo can be heard. They are therefore ideal for percussive
metal. With vocals a plate reverb generates a smooth “wellness effect”.
Spring Reverb: You probably remember Spring Reverb from guitar and keyboard
amps, particularly older ones. At the bottom of these amps a unit consisting of two to
four spirals is mounted on a vibration-free carriage. As with the reverb plate it uses
systems for transforming the electric signal into a mechanical one. There are different
designs and sizes of spring reverb; however, they all have the same quite peculiar
sound: the typical “bloing” sound when the springs are moved, similar to splashing.
When the reverb dies away the basic pitch of the spring(s) can usually be heard quite
clearly. Furthermore, the frequency range is considerably limited due to the losses in
the spirals and in the used pick-up/transmitter. Despite this, the sound is special and
some of the latest music styles (e.g. dub & reggae) would hardly be possible without
spring reverb.
Parameters
The reverb effect has the following parameters:
Size: defines the size of the room (or the system for the plate and spring). With some
low “size” settings you can also reduce the distance between the individual
reflections. This allows resonance to develop (accentuated frequency ranges), which
can sound oppressive if the reverb sustain is too long. The proper size for each
instrument can be gauged by taking into account the interplay between the room and
the resonance.
Time: reverberation time. With this controller you can define how far the echo will be
absorbed, i.e. the time for the reverb to die away. Turning this knob to the left
minimizes the time. You will then only hear the first reflection. Turning the knob to the
right minimizes the absorption and thus results in a long sustained reverberation.
Color: within certain limits you can influence the sound characteristic of the effect.
The effect of this controller depends on the used preset. In rooms “Color” controls the
dampening of the highs in the reverb (from dark to bright) as well as pre-filtering of
the signal. The controllers for plate and spring presets also determine the dampening
of the basses.
Mix: this controller sets the mix ratio between the original and the edited signal. For
rooms you can therefore quite easily move a signal further into the room by increasing
the effect share. The last four presets are intended for use in an AUX channel of the
mixer and are set to 100%.

144
www.magix.com
Presets
The presets are primarily sorted by instruments; however, you can (and should)
choose which preset you want to use for which instrument. The rooms in particular
have completely different characteristics which are noticeable for some and more
subtle for others. Generally we recommend reverb with many individually audible
reflections and slight diffusions for dense arrangements. On the other hand you can
use Plate Reverb for minimally arranged songs in order to create a dense atmosphere.
However, you should avoid adding reverb to too many instruments. Sometimes some
extra mixing is sufficient to move an instrument slightly away from the total sound. It
is often recommendable to adjust the sustain to the song tempo, i.e. the faster the
track, the shorter the reverb. Otherwise the sound easily sounds washed-out and
indifferent.
Here is a list of the presets and their characteristics:
Drums and percussion
Drums: Studio A: small room, high diffusion, e.g. for percussion instruments
Drums: Studio B: slightly larger & more lively than A, medium diffusion, distinct first
reflections, signals seem closer than A
Drums: Medium-sized room: medium-sized room, moderate reverb, medium
diffusion, relatively few first reflections
Drums: empty hall: medium-sized empty hall, medium diffusion
Drums: Snare reverb plate A: plate reverb, high diffusion, relatively bright sound
character, typical hissing of a reverb plate.
Drums: Snare reverb plate B: reverb plate, high diffusion, slight dampening of highs &
basses, sound moves more to mids with time, stereo panorama narrower than for A
Vocals
Voice: main hall A: standard hall, e.g. for monitoring/recording, medium-sized room,
medium diffusion, minimum sustain time
Voice: main hall B: like A, but as a small hall (longer delay times than A), distinct
reflection pattern, longer reverb time
Voice: early reflections: medium-sized room, low reverberation share, very distinct
early reflection pattern, e.g. for spreading vocals
Voice: warmer room: small, intimate room, dark character
Voice: studio reverb plate A: reverb plate with medium diffusion, slight dark
adjustment, comprehensive sound characteristics
Voice: studio reverb plate B: Like A, but more diffusion and bright to medium sound
adjustment, slight vintage character
Voice: large hall: large hall, medium diffusion, relatively long reverb time
Voice: cathedral: delayed attack, slight diffusion, complex echo pattern, some hard
reflections, dark voice adjustment, long reverb sustain
Guitar
Guitar: Spring reverb mono A: spring reverb simulation, typical oscillating sound of
the springs, limited frequency range

Audio effects 145

Guitar: Spring reverb mono B: Like A, slightly broader frequency range, greater
diffusion
Guitar: Spring hall stereo A: similar to spring hall mono A, but one
spring/transmission system per channel (L/R)As a result of the mechanical
interlinking of the systems, the reverberations meet at the middle of the stereo field
Guitar: Spring reverb stereo B: Like stereo A, slightly broader frequency range,
greater diffusion
Keys (Piano, Synthesizer)
Keys: Stage reverb: Larger room with stage, high amount of complex first reflections,
slightly delayed attack, medium reverberation
Keys: piano reverb: concert hall, long reverberation, medium diffusion, minimum dark
adjustment
Aux (to be used as a send effect in a mixer FX track)
Aux: Room: Standard room for the aux path, mix 100%, medium-sized, medium
diffusion, some distinct first reflections, low reverberation
Aux: Hall: Medium-sized hall (100% wet), medium diffusion, short reverberation
Aux: Reverb plate: Reverb plate (100% wet), high diffusion, light bright adjustment
Aux: Spring reverb: Reverb spring (100% wet), stereo, high diffusion, slightly medium
sound characteristics
Delay (echo)
The echo effect is defined more closely with ‘delay’ and ‘feedback’ and calculated into
the original sound by means of ‘mix’.
Delay: Here the period of time between the individual echo’s can be determined; the
more you turn the control to the left, the faster the echo’s will follow each other.
Feedback: Here the number of echo’s can be adjusted. Turned completely to the left,
there is no echo at all; turned completely to the right there are virtually endless
repetitions.
Sound Warper

Distortion
This is a distorter, which over-modulates the audio object.
Gain: With these controls you adjust the degree of distortion. ‘Gain’ designates the
prestage to an amplifier.

146
www.magix.com
Cut off: Here you adjust the frequency ranges that are to be distorted.
Volume: Here you can adjust the volume of the distorter. The higher you set the
‘gain’ control, the louder the distortion when compared to the overall volume.
Filter
Similar to an equalizer, the filter controls the volume of certain frequency ranges. It is
however also possible to completely suppress frequencies so that very impressive
distortions are possible.
Frequency: Here you set the frequency that is to be filtered.
Level: Here the filtering intensity is adjusted.
Resonance: Here you set the range (band width) around the frequency which is to be
boosted together with the frequency.
Volume: Here the filter volume can be adjusted separately.
Gater

This special effect "chops up" a sample into a given number of parts (16-128) Select
the number of steps, which will then be distributed over the duration of the sample.
Additionally you can set the volume for each individual step using the fader, so that
the hard sections can be produced in the same way as soft levels.
The Gater function can also work as a filter to create interesting sound deformations
which are particularly good for Techno! This is useful when you want to create a cool
sample from a sound without its own rhythm.

Audio effects 147

In "Division" you can set more than 16 sections to produce even more variations in the
sound. . The fader settings are then repeated which means that step 17 has the same
value as step 1 etc.
A real-time monitoring function allows immediate musical control of any fader
change.
Principally, there are two operating modes which can be combined with each other:
Volume or filter progressions
The objective of this function is to change the volume or the sound character of the
audio material in 16 or more steps with the aid of the 16 faders. The default setting of
every fader corresponds with one sixteenth of the audio material – i.e. a sixteenth note
in a 1 bar loop or an eighth note for a two bar loop, etc.
This leads to interesting rhythmic results, e.g. by lowering the volume of individual
faders or through stepped volume increases. Various progressions can also be quickly
created with the help of the random function. The real-time screening function
permits constant acoustic control while this is being done!
Gater progressions make it very simple to create rhythmic sounds from a simple
strings or synthesizer section or to emphasize or tone down certain beats in a drum
loop.
Reordering
The playback sequence of the 16 steps can be changed with the colored key fields
located below the faders. This makes it possible to repeat a beat from the first
sixteenth in the fourth sixteenth. To do this, the number under Fader No. 1 must be
the figure 1. The fact that item 4 will now play back the material in item 1 is shown in
color.
Does this sound complicated?
If so, simply try the Random function. It instantly pronumerous variations. If you have
the Real-time screening function running, you can then quickly decide for yourself,
which groove you like better!
You can use the Re-order function to derive totally different variations from a drum
loop quickly and impressively.
Backwards
When Backwards is applied the sound file will be played in reverse. This way you can
create very interesting effects, not to mention the “hidden messages” in many songs...

148
www.magix.com
Timestretch/Resample

This effect device changes the object’s speed and/or pitch.
Pitch: This control changes the pitch independently of the object’s speed (‘pitch-
shifting’).
Tempo: This control changes the tempo independently of the pitch ("time-
stretching"). The object acts as if it were compressed or stretched on the track.
Tones/BPM: These fields are used to numerically enter the pitch or speed change.
Only MAGIX Soundpool files are suitable for numeric entries because they are
equipped with information regarding pitch and speed.
Setup: This button opens a setup dialog where you can select various pitchshifting
and timestretching procedures.
• Standard: Timestretching and pitchshifting in standard quality. This method is
suitable for audio material without a pronounced beat. Existing beat markers are
evaluated to improve audio quality.
• Smoothed: Timestretching and pitchshifting for audio material without pulsing
elements. The method is suitable for several voice orchestra instruments,
surfaces, speech and singing. Beat markers will not be evaluated.
• Beat marker slicing: Beat-synchronous timestretching and pitchshifting via
splitting and temporal repositioning. Precisely set beat markers are required at
the beats or transients. Markers can be generated in real time (automatically) or
read out from the source file, as long as they are available (patched). In the
Premium version's included MAGIX Music Editor, a patching tool is provided for
users to set the markers themselves.
• Beat marker stretching: Beat-synchronized timestretching and pitchshifting in
high audio quality. The material is stretched between beat markers positions so
that the impacts or attacks at the beat markers positions are not impaired by
stretching. The markers can be generated in real time from the audio material
(automatically), provided they are present (patched).
• Beat marker stretching (smoothed): Beat-synchronized timestretching and
pitchshifting in high audio quality, even with extreme time extension. Beat
markers are used at the beats or transients. The markers can be generated in real
time from the audio material (automatically), or read out from the wave file,
provided they are present (patched).

Audio effects 149

• Universal HQ: Universal method for timestretching and pitchshifting in very high
audio quality. Suitable for all types of audio material.
• Monophonic voice: Time-stretching and pitch-shifting for vocal solos, speech or
solo instruments.
• Resampling: Pitch shift and tempo cannot be changed individually. This method
requires comparably little CPU time.
essential FX
MAGIX essential FX is a collection of "bread and butter effects" for the most
important applications. They are embedded as VST plug-ins (MAGIX plug-ins
directory) and may be used in the object or in the track. For object application, see
"FX plug-ins (view page 137)" in the "Audio effects" chapter or "Track effects (view
page 134)" in the "Mixer" chapter.
These are simple but solid tools with clear feature sets for daily application. They
include fewer controllers and require less resources.
MAGIX Plug-Ins
Console
Some MAGIX plug-ins show a so-called "Console at the top edge when they are
opened – a display bar for managing presets with expanded settings options.

A menu containing available presets is located behind the display. To the right is a
prev/next button, which lets you leaf through presets.

Presets can be saved with this button. MAGIX plug-ins use its own save
format (*.fxml)

You can return the presets to their initial settings by clicking on the
"Reset" button.

Bypass switch: Routes the signal directly to the output instead and
bypasses processing. Internally, processing is continued so that you can
toggle between processed and unprocessed material anytime.

A/B comparison: Very useful for trying out settings. The controller setting
"A" memory is normally activated when the interface is opened.
As this is the initial status, "B" also contains the same settings. If you would like to
experiment without losing the current setting, press the "B" buttons and try other
settings. To transfer the values to "A", press the copy button between the two letters.

"?" button: This opens the online help for the plug-in.


150
www.magix.com
Parameter Smoothing
Each plug-in offers soft controlling. Pot settings are softly faded internally from the old
value to the new one. This is particularly noticeable when playing in "Live" mode. Due
to performance reasons, switches (e.g. on/off) and some settings of VariVerb Pro
that change delay times directly or indirectly are excluded from this action.
Vpot Controls
Some controllers snap to the middle setting, which may be useful for quickly returning
to a "neutral" status. It is extremely difficult to adjust the fine settings within close
proximity of this snap point. You can temporarily deactivate this snap mode by
holding "Shift" before touching the controller.
Use the mouse wheel to adjust the controllers. A combination of the mouse wheel
and "Shift" key reduces the increase/decrease by factor ten.
Apropos the controller movement, note that all plug-ins follow the host settings
regarding linear or circular mouse movement. You can usually choose whether you
prefer up/down or a circular movement to adjust the value.
essentialFX presets
By clicking on the tool symbol in the graphic display, you can open the presets.
Under "Tweak" you can find specific settings options for each effects device.
Under "eFX Globals" you can find settings options for graphic level display as well as
mouse control.

eFX Globals
These settings are valid for all essentialFX.
Metering: Here you can set the meter display.

Audio effects 151

• Decay Time controls reaction speed.
• Peak Hold controls the hold of the highest peak.
• Brightness controls the display brightness.
Mouse: Here you can set the display reaction to mouse movements in the essential
FX graphic display.
• Linear mode lets the faders move in response to vertical and horizontal mouse
movements.
• Circular mode lets the faders be controlled by circular mouse movements.
• Mode As Host lets the faders move in response to the mouse exactly how mouse
settings in MAGIX Music Maker 2013 specify it.
• [Shift] Factor specifies the factor for fine adjustment of individual faders with the
mouse with simultaneously held Shift key.
Chorus/Flanger
This plug-in offers a simple way to make signals sound more interesting, "spacier",
thicker, etc. by modulating or delaying the pitch - the classical domain of application
is for guitars, Hammond organs, electric pianos, or synths.
Chorus and flanger are two closely related effects, which are combined into a single
plug-in. They normally differentiate in terms of delay time, type of modulation, and
degree of internal feedback.


152
www.magix.com
Chorus flanger parameters
IN / OUT: Here you can set the input and output level.
mode:
- Stereo chorus: Compared to mono chorus, two copies of the original are created,
modulated against each other in pitch, and then fed accordingly to the set mix ratio to
the left and right output channel.
- Mono Flanger & Stereo Flanger In contrast to the Chorus Effects the lower delay
periods and a slightly changed modulation are processed.
- Ensemble: This creates a denser chorus, similar to Boss/Roland CE-1: Instead of two
voices, six are generated. Two internal sine LFOs for de-tuning, whereby for both
LFOs the second and third voice phase length by 120°. This results in a denser-
sounding effect that is also less warped.
• Rate: This specifies the speed of the modulation. Lower rates provide slight
hovering effects, and high speeds produce a wobbling, typically distorted
"underwater" sound.
• Depth: This parameter specifies the depth of the modulation, i. e. the maximum
deviation of the modulation and the resulting pitch bending.
• phase: This fader moves the right channel's oscillator phasing relative to the left,
wave is put back to the right. So that the Tremolo effect drifts apart in the stereo
field with ever increasing values. At 180° both oscillators work in reverse,
therefore the stereo effect is at its strongest.
• Feedback: This parameter defines the portion of the delay that is sent back to the
input. Feedback causes the effects of modulation to be more drastic and cutting.
Nullification of the feedback is set at the middle of the fader. Set to the right, the
feedback is fed to the input equi-phasal; to the left, the feedback occurs. Both
variants may sound very different depending on the signal, since they prefer
different frequency ranges for dissonance.
• Mix: Regulates the mix ratio of the original signal and the delayed portion.
Tweak
• Low Cut: This knob sets the filter frequency of a high-pass filter. Signal
components below this frequency will be filtered out.


Audio effects 153

Phaser
The phaser is often mistaken for a flanger due to its typically sharper and cutting
effect. In any case, the pitch is not modulated. Instead, the modulation process
burrows multiple notches into the frequency response, somewhat like a comb filter.
Just like an airplane taking off, the phaser functions with a similar jet effect. It is
suitable for enduring signals like synth surfaces or for producing sound designs to
create atmosphere or distortion effects.

Phaser parameters
IN / OUT: Here you can set the input and output level.
Mode: The selection includes a number of filter stages. At 4 stages/8 stages, a more
plastic effect is achieved, and more complex patterns are reached at 16 stages. Please
note that the more stages are involved, the more computing time will be needed.
• Rate: Speed of filter modulation. The essential effect is the same for both chorus
and flanger.
• Depth: Similar to chorus/flanger, whereby it's the filter notches that are
addressed, and not the pitch modulation.
• phase: This fader moves the right channel's oscillator phasing relative to the left,
wave is put back to the right. So that the Tremolo effect drifts apart in the stereo
field with ever increasing values. At 180° both oscillators work in reverse,
therefore the stereo effect is at its strongest.
• Feedback: The feedback portion produces a more drastic effect in this case.
Similarly to the chorus/flanger, co-phasal or opposite-phase feedback is possible.

154
www.magix.com
• Mix: Regulates the mix ratio of the original signal and the delayed portion.
Tweak
• Center Freq: Sets the mid-frequencies of the phaser. The filter modulation acts on
these frequencies.

Stereo Delay
The stereo delay is a simple too for typical bread and butter delay effects. The stereo
delay offers the "analog algorithm", which features the sound of echo devices of
yesteryear.

Stereo delay parameters
IN / OUT: Here you can set the input and output level.
Mode: This selects between the essential algorithms.
Digital: Normal, transparent delay

Audio effects 155

- Analog tape: Analog tape delay simulation. In this mode, a band echo is simulated
with a typical compression and saturation behavior, including phase shifts with high
feedback settings.
Analog BBD: Simulation of a bucket brigade delay (BBD, bucket brigade delay). These
devices, which originate from the pre-digital era, used analog building blocks for
storage. The signal was held for a short time in a relatively simple circuit and then
moved on to the next. This "bucket brigade" principle created a longer signal delay.
BBDs create different delay times by varying the system beat (clock), meaning that
for short delays the beat is faster, and for longer it is slower.
• Tempo sync: If this button is active, the plug-in is directed at the host/sequencer
tempo. In this mode, changes are made to the delay period via the L/R delay
using the musical snap grid (e. g. 1/4 note).
• Delay L/Delay R: Specify the delay period for the left and right channels here.
• Damping: This specifies the cut-off frequency at which the highs are dampened
during the delay. This useful for making the delays reverberate more naturally or
for creating special effects (reggae/dub-style effects).
• Feedback: This parameter regulates the internal amplitude of the delayed signal
that is fed back to the input. In "Digital" mode, this process is completely
transparent; in "Analog", on the other hand, higher values, a very loud input
signal, or the sum of these will make the use of dynamics compression audible. In
both modes, the nullification of the feedback parameter is in the center of the
fader. To the right, the plug-in works in "Dual delay" mode (both sides work
independently), and to the left, "Ping pong" mode will be activated (the delayed
signal alternates between the left and right sides).
• Mix: Regulates the mix ratio of the original signal and the delayed portion.
Tweak
• Feedback Low Cut: This control sets the filter frequency of a high-pass filter for
the "feedback". Signal components below this frequency will be filtered out.
• Tape / BBD Noise: Here you can control system noise for both analog modes.
Especially if you work with high feedback rates, noise can create quick or stable
oscillation, making the effect even more authentic.
• BBD Stages: Here you can determine the count of For very long delays, chips
with many memory cells are used. This explains why bucket brigade echoes with
long delays sound so muffled and dirty. Please keep in mind that the shorter the
delay, the faster is the "virtual" system beat. For performance reasons, the system
beat is limited. The limit is displayed below the delay control (with deactivated
"tempo sync") as soon as it is reached, e. g. 46 ms (min).
• BBD Compander: Here you can simulate Compander settings. Due to per-cell
loss, BBDs have low system dynamics. For this reason, some have an integrated
compander (compression at the input, counter-expansion at the output). Strong
compander settings interact noticeably with the input signal, especially with high

156
www.magix.com
feedback, because the input effects the expansion ration at the output, even
when there is no signal at the input.
• BBD Clock Drift: This parameter can add drift (during audible jitter effects) by
slightly varying the system beat of BBD cells. It works similarly to an LFO, but is
randomized.

Vintage Effects Suite
If you're a guitar, bass or keyboard player, you'll probably recognize the look of our
new "vintage effects" suite. They are accurate digital models of analog "standard
effects" used by live musicians. Although we have adopted the appearance of stomp
boxes and have given these effect a typical analog sound they are ideal for studio use.
All effects of the Vintage Effects Suite are subject to a soft rule behavior – internally,
parameters are softly faded from the old to the new value. This is particularly
noticeable when presets change and is of a particular benefit when playing in live
mode.
In the following we will present the effects of this suite and explain how and where to
use them.

Audio effects 157

Analog Delay

This delay offers creative playing along with common delay effects. "Analog" in this
case means, for instance, that you can change the delay times while playing without
the risk of typical, scratching artefacts developing. Instead, the times are softly faded
out, similar to the old tape echo machines that used the tape speed to change the
delay and where the system also had a certain sluggishness.
"analog" in terms of this delay also means that typical tape echo sounds can be
mimicked, e.g. tape speed fluctuations and reduced highs during playback
("feedback"). The feedback has a two-band filter that can be used to create dark, high,
or mid repetitions depending on the settings.
These properties can be useful, for example to create "wild" dub/reggae-style delays
that move towards the center of the sound with each repetition and even grind
slightly. In this case, "analog" means that you cannot digitally overdrive the delay.
Even in a 'looped' repetition, the signal cannot be distorted indefinitely, but it is
compressed by an increasingly slight degree and distorted similar to a tape.
Analog delay parameter
Analog delay has the following parameters:
Delay type

158
www.magix.com
Delay type (l + r): Left and right delay times can be controlled separately (see below).
You can choose a note value for the control pots to snap to. Even and syncopated
note values from 1/2 to 1/32 are available. Note that the delay times are always in
relation to the project’s current tempo.

Link button (lock symbol): Press this button to control the “delay type” pots for
both channels simultaneously.
Mix: Adjusts the ration between the original signal and the echo.
Modulation
Speed: The tape warble speed. Low values result in very light fluctuations, high values
result in drastic warbling.
Depth: The warble intensity. When this control is turned all the way to the left, there
is no pitch modulation. For a subtle "analog" feel, we recommend a setting between
the 9 and 11 o’clock position.
Filter
"Low" This control progressively reduces the bass frequency as it is turned
to the right, making the signal sound "thinner".
"High" Once turned all the way to the right, the control only attenuates the
treble very lightly; turned completely to the left, the delay repetitions
become progressively less treble.
Feedback
Width: This controls the stereo width of the delay repetitions. When you turn
“Width” to the right, an additional effect is produced: the panning of the delays
increases. This is commonly referred to as a "ping-pong" delay.
Drive: When this control is turned all the way to the left, the delayed signal is
repeated only once. Turned all the way to the right, the feedback is seemingly endless
and the repetitions continue for a long time.
The actual strength of the effect is dependent on the material, since the feedback loop
(as explained earlier) is addressed via compression and uses a "tape saturation"
effect. If you send a "loud" signal to the delay, then the feedback will sound longer
than at a lower level as compression "brings it up" to a certain level. If you are used to
"purely digital" delays, then this might take some getting used to, but it will probably
sound "livelier".

Audio effects 159

Flanger

The "Flange" effect is similar to that of the chorus, but does have a different technical
and historical background. It came about by chance: Someone (various sources say
John Lennon) slowed down one of two running interconnected tape machines in a
studio with his hand. The result: The rather brief delay of the second signal compared
to the first resulted in cancellations within the frequency spectrum, leading to a so-
called comb filter effect (the sum of both signals creates "peaks" and "lows" in the
spectrum that look familiar to the teeth of a comb).
Flanging is basically a chorus effect, but it has a lower delay time (less than 10 ms).
"Release" or signal doubling is not highlighted here; the result is a much more creative
frequency response deformation.
A "complete" flange effect will definitely require feedback: The flange portion is
returned to the input to increase the effect. People often talk about the "jet effect",
since it resembles a jet on take-off.
Flanger parameters
Speed: Modulation speed.
Depth: The overall amount of modulation.
Feedback: The volume of the internal feedback loop.

160
www.magix.com
Mode:
Normal: Flanging.
Dual: Two parts, panned left and right.
Quad: Four parts, alternately panned left and right.
Quad pan: Like “Quad”, but the “Depth” control also sets the intensity of the signal’s
pan movements between left and right.
Filter

"Filter" is a "modulation" effect like chorus and flanger. However, it controls the
frequency response of a modulation source as well as the pitch. There are various
filter types and modulation sizes available for this.
Possible areas of application are synthesizer sounds (filter sweeps on pads) or
creative distortions of drumloops (e.g. for variations, fills, etc). With guitars you can
create typical 'wah' effects: either by tempo modulation or in a special mode,
modulation via the envelope curve. The decisive factor is the current signal strength
above the frequency set for the filter.

Audio effects 161

Filter parameters
Speed: The modulation speed is set by note values ranging from 1/1 to 1/16 (even or
dotted). Similar to analog delay, the tempo information is automatically provided by
the arrangement.
A peculiarity of the final position of the controller:

Tempo synchronization stops and modulation is controlled via the signal level.
Freq: This is the base frequency for modulating the filter, and generally takes place
above this frequency, i.e. the modulation increases the filter frequency.
Depth: This control determines the modulation depth, i.e. the amount by which the
speed control (or envelope mode, as described above) increases the base frequency.
For extreme effects, turn “Freq” all the way to the left and “Depth” all the way to the
right.
Filter modes
Low-pass A filter with a slope of 24 dB/octave and a small amount of
resonance. The treble frequencies above the base frequency
(cut-off frequency) are filtered steeply. This is great for
filter sweeps on synth pads and drum loops.
Band-pass Only the frequencies around the base frequency are passed
through the filter (24 dB slope with resonance). Use this
mode to create wah-wah effects for guitars.
Band
elimination
(„Notch-Filter")
Two parallel filters (–36 dB) with linked base frequencies
create two ‘notches’ in the frequency spectrum. This allows
you to create interesting sounds (e.g. guitar chords), and it
sounds similar to a phaser.
High-pass This mode achieves the opposite effect to the low-pass
filter. Frequencies below the base frequency are filtered
steeply. If you ‘thin out’ sections of your track (for example,
a drum track) with a tempo-based modulation, this can
sound very effective when contrasted with the full-range
frequency spectrum (for example, if the filter is turned off
for the next object).


162
www.magix.com
Chorus

The chorus pedal creates characteristic "floating" sounds which one typically
recognizes from guitar or synth pads. You can add acoustic "depth" to an instrument
to add more power to the sound or to create the illusion that it exists multiple times.
The chorus sound is created by using the so-called Doppler effect. You probably have
noticed this phenomenon daily life: The sound of an approaching ambulance sounds
higher than when it is moving away. This effect is a result of the speed of the sound
which first increases and then decreases, thus also changing the sound pitch. If there
were a second siren at your location, an oscillation would develop between both
sounds (just like when two instruments are out of tune).
Chorus also splits the signal in at least two: direct sound and effects part. The double
effect is created by a short signal delay of the effect.
This delay is within the range of 10-30 ms (as in this one), this means that it is short
enough to be perceived as an "echo". The times would also be similarly short if you
were to double a guitar track for instance. A short delay in the mix already sounds
"doubled" but is not authentic. This is where the above-mentioned "out-of-tune"
effect comes in: The pitch of the effect signal is slightly modulated by gently "drifting"
forward and backward in the delay curve. The result is a floating effect where the
speed is influenced by drifting

Audio effects 163

Chorus parameters
You can enter the following parameters to control the floating effect:
Speed: Modulation speed. Low speeds create an even, continuous development. High
speeds produce vibrato-like qualities, but can also result in an "underwater" effect.
Depth: Modulation depth. This determines how strongly the speed affects the pitch
modulation.
Mix: This sets the balance between the direct signal and the effects signal.
Mode: You can choose between four operating modes of the chorus effect:
“Normal” is a combination of the direct signal and the detuned delay signal.
“Normal, low-pass” is designed for bass-heavy signals like bass guitar. The bottom
end of the signal stays clear and well-defined, the effect is only audible for the mid
and treble frequencies.
“Dual” makes the source sound more lively than a single "part". The sound is spread
over the stereo panorama, which makes this mode seem "wider". The character of the
sound becomes livelier than with a single voice only, and it is also distributed over the
stereo panorama, making the mode sound "broader".
“Quad, low-pass” is ideal for creating sounds such as deep synth pads with tight bass
frequencies.
Tip: Similar to the stomp boxes our vintage effects are modeled on, there is a
"footswitch" below the pedal’s logo that can be clicked to turn the effect on or off for
A/B comparisons. All the effects of the Vintage Effects Suite have been designed
like this.

164
www.magix.com
Distortion

The distortion pedal is a "high gain" distorter for crunch and lead guitar sounds. If you
like typically "British" amp sounds and want to quickly record a guitar track with little
effort, this pedal is for you.
An entire valve pre-amp circuit has been modeled, including the typical EQ curve. The
amplification is "valve-typical", i.e. it doesn't start quickly but is harmonic and soft.
Even at full power the pedal still reacts softly to a guitar and its settings (e.g. pick-up
choice and tone controller). For instance, you can influence the distortion even more
by using the volume knob on the guitar.
There are only three parameters on this effect; however, these interact with each
other and can thus generate quite a variable sound:
• Low: The "bass" controller. This allows you to set the share of basses, even after
the distortion. The type of prefiltering is important for guitar amps in particular,
and is characteristic for the basic sound. You should set the bass controller
depending on the basic sound of the guitar and the sound you are aiming for
("powerful" or "cut").
• High: Mainly controls the share of highs before and after the distortion. If you are
not using an external guitar speaker as a monitor, we recommend setting the
controller to the middle position or even moving it slightly to the right. This way
the "sharp" highs disappear, which all guitar amps generate without the suitable
loudspeaker. At the same time the mids stand out more, which gives the sound

Audio effects 165

more "kick". On the other hand you can further emphasize the highs if you want
the sound to be more neutral.
• Drive: The level of distortion. This controls the amplification used to operate the
"virtual valve circuit" (max. 60 dB). As the level increases, the valve goes into
overdrive and generates typical distortions. For a slightly distorted sound
("crunch"), it's sufficient to set the controller to 10-11 hours at maximum; the
modeled circuit also provides the usual "weight" for power rock chords, and
more. The further you turn this controller to the right, the more the mids of the
signal move to the fore so that the "high-gain" lead sound is better heard.
You can also use the distortion effect in combination with the amp simulation!
BitMachine

Audio material can always be edited into high quality with MAGIX Music Maker
2013. Nevertheless, there are some situations, for example, a more imperfect lo-fi
sound would perfectly suit a drum loop or a synthesizer sound.
Remember, for example, the first hardware samplers from the 80s that usually only
ran at 8 or 12-bit rates and at low sample rates. With the BitMachine, changing the
sound with such an "antique" device is no problem.
You can use the BitMachine to bring back to life the times when minimalist and
scratchy soundchips in home computers were commonplace.
The BitMachine opens up a gateway to "acoustic time travel" where you can
encounter bit and sample rate reduction and downstream filters based on analog
models.
Furthermore, the effect has a modulation section with which you can control
individual parameters using an oscillator (LFO) or the input signal.
We have designed a range of "typical" presets to demonstrate the time travel abilities
of the BitMachine. These can be opened at the top right of the interface
The following section describes the details of BitMachine:
"Reduction" section
Bits

166
www.magix.com
This dial controls the resolution of the audio material. Turning the dial to the left
results in 16-bit quantization (CD quality). The further it is turned to the right, the
lesser the signal dynamic becomes. In extreme cases (1-bit), there are only "on“ or
"off“ states.
At the intermediate levels, you’ll notice an increase in the background noise and a
decrease in the dynamics. For example, 8-bit quantization will exhibit dynamics of
only 48 dB. Quieter points in the material sound noisy and very quiet points sound
"capped“. This effect is amplified the more you turn the dial to the left until it starts
crackling or "groaning".
Sample rate
The audio material is "down-calculated" with this dial, i.e. the internal sample rate is
reduced. A new separation ratio between old and new rates is created. In relation to
this ratio, a sample from the data stream will be "dropped“ at the various points.
Note: The two smaller dials from this section are explained under Modulation.
"Filter" section
The filter in the BitMachine is a digital model of one of the most well-known filters in
music electronics, i.e. the "Chamberlin 2-pole" filter used in old Oberheim
synthesizers. These types of filters sound exceptionally musical. They can also be
used quite creatively in the BitMachine, but should not be used exclusively to smooth
out existing artifacts.
The filter works in the so-called "high-pass" mode, i.e. it lets through deep frequency
(or medium) material according to setting, and dampens highs and medium areas.
Freq:
You can specify the cut-off frequency of the filter using "Freq". Filtering starts above
this frequency.
Reso:
The signal in the area around the cut-off frequency can be strongly elevated to just
below self-oscillation. Sharp, cutting sounds are possible at this level, and the effect
becomes even clearer when you vary the cut-off frequency.
Drive:
Both of the individual filters of the connections mentioned above have the ability to
overmodulate themselves internally. With the "Drive“ dial, you can regulate the
amount of overmodulation. The more you turn this dial up, the more the signal is
overmodulated. In this case, the parameters of the internal workings of the filter

Audio effects 167

interact with one another. Increasing drive weakens the resonance, but, at the same
time, the signal gets more volume, more bass and becomes acoustically fuller.
Note: The two smaller dials from this section are explained under "Modulation".
"Modulation" section
You can automate your effects via the settings in the modulation section.
Here, you’ll find the so-called low frequency oscillator (LFO), which resonates with
adjustable speed. You can influence the speed and type of resonance.
To influence the resonance, use the two small dials in both the reduction and filter
areas. These four dials display modulation targets.
Example: You’ve left the dial for the sample rate at its default setting. Change the
small dial beneath from its middle position to either side. The modulation for the dial
value is added to the sample rate: The LFO now controls these parameters
proportionately and the sample rate reduction resonates at this modulation.
You can use this technique on other dials as well. You just have to make sure that the
main dial isn’t turned up to full, because then the modulation wouldn’t have any
effect. The modulation is always added to the set value.
Example: Turn the small dial beneath the "bits" dial fully to the left (Value: -50) and
the one beside it (beneath "sample rate") to the right (+50). You’ve now assigned a
modulation to both parameters with the LFO. They are not changed uniformly, but
rather opposite to one another: A negative setting is nothing more than an inversion
of the modulation, so you’re effectively turning down the control signal.
Waveforms of the modulation section
We’ve already explained this example with the help of sine oscillation. The LFO can
be in:
• Sine form
• Square wave (0 or 1, no intermediate level)
• Random value (an internal randomizer will be queried at the set speed)
Oscillator speed
The LFO speed is specified with the "speed“ dial. If the "sync“ button is active, then
the LFO adapts to the song speed, and the dial locks musical values into place (e.g. ¼
note). Rhythmic paths of the sound distortion are therefore enabled. You can also
switch off this synchronization and set the speed manually (in Hz).
Modulation with the "Envelope follower“

168
www.magix.com
In the modulation section you’ll find a fourth button, the audio input signal. If this
mode is active, then the signal itself can be called upon to extract “modulation
tension”; a so-called "envelope follower" continuously scans the volume of the input
signal.
Note: The BitMachine doesn’t recognize the type of audio signal automatically. For
this reason, you should set the input sensitivity roughly with the "gain“ dial. To do
this, use the control LED: With accurate detection of the signal dynamics, assigning
the four small dials to modulation lows is easier and you can use the full control
range.
In envelope mode, the "speed“ dial is used to control the response speed of the
envelope (the display now switches to milliseconds). Lower times result in a faster
response, higher times make the envelope rise (and fall) slower. You should
experiment with the signal according to its complexity. The presets provided can only
point you in a rough direction.
Vandal SE


Audio effects 169

Virtual Guitar & Bass Amplification
VANDAL is a complete simulation suite for guitarists and bassists. The plug-in is
capable of simulating the entire signal chain, from input to stomp boxes, amplifiers,
microphone loudspeaker boxes and post-processing studio effects, all in top quality.
Quick start via preset selection
Would you like to know about everything that's possible with Vandal SE? Play
yourself or use some of the presets. These are available via the list in the upper edge
of the interface.
A preset includes all settings for the main elements of Vandal SE: Stomps, amp
settings, cabinet simulation, and studio effects.

Tuner
The best amp or the best simulation is useless if the guitar is out of tune. VANDAL
offers its own chromatic tuning device for this. You can use it like any analog device: It
automatically displays the note that has been struck (in octave) and the display
visualizes deviations (in cents).

The following describes the major components of VANDAL. The stations are
described according to their position in the signal chain.
Input
The station that you will most likely want to activate first is the input controller. Just
like with a genuine guitar or bass setup, it's important to ensure the highest possible
input level, in order to work optimally. This is even more important for distorted
sounds and natural high-gain playing styles. Use metering for this, too.
As required, activate the noise gate and adjust it so that it lightly suppresses the input

170
www.magix.com
signal during pauses in playing. VANDAL does not cut the input on classic gates too
hard, but rather regulates them finely via the signal energy beginning at the highs
(where noise is most audible).

Stomp boxes
The real world has produced a series of effect devices popular with guitarists and
bassists in the "stomp box" format. We've also included a rich palette of these
devices. Vandal SE includes four "stomp slots" that can be equipped with effects from
the list. The signal flow within this chain runs from left to right. Since all of the
controls are self-explanatory, we won't describe them here.

Vandal - Amplifier
Vandal SE basically offers 2 different amplifiers: Guitar Amp and Bass Amp. The
amplifier type depends on the selected preset.
During development, a large selection of famous amplifier brands and models were
not included. To guarantee that you are nevertheless able to get a number of different
sound characteristics out of your Vandal SE amp, the amplifiers are set up variably.
Internally, circuit designs work absolutely the same as the real devices. In several
ways, however, Vandal SE goes in its own direction in terms of the sound it offers.
Guitar amp
The Vandal SE guitar amp offers three different pre-amp modes and two switchable
end stage models. These basic configurations differ according to the selected preset.
The guitar amp is set up with three channels. These may be set up with the pre and
post gain controllers per channel (Clean, Crunch, and Lead) for the desired mix ratio.
Don't worry about switching things around: The amplifier will remember the gain
settings when channels are changed. These are the gain presets for the different
playing styles within a song.

Audio effects 171


Voicing: We have provided Vandal SE pre-amps with something that we call Curve
EQ. For example, if you take a simple EQ pedal and shape the signal a little before the
amp, then this may change the sound quite drastically. Curve EQ does something
similar: It's located (in some cases multiply) at strategically important points between
individual amplifier stages and filters the signal, before it is distorted by the next
stage. Move the curve in both directions and navigate through the spectrum using the
"Freq" controller. This will give the amp a completely different character...
Equalization: The actual sound control (the "tone stack") functions rather
conventionally: Vandal SE offers low, mid & high settings. Everything functions like
the passive sound regulation network in genuine amps, so that the controllers
influence each other to produce numerous variations.
Reverb: Surf and twang simply need on-board spring reverb. We relied on well-known
reverb springs for modeling. Everything sounds natural with complete authenticity.
Bass amp

After roughly setting the Gain controller, the bass signal will first be treated with the
Contour circuit. This filtering stage works similarly to the "Loudness" function by
cutting the (lower) mids and lifting the deep bass and highs. It's sort of like an "instant
slap".
Next, the signal passes through the compressor stage (Comp). This is a simple but
extremely musical, visual design: The bass triggers a light source that is coupled with
a photo resistor which dampens the signal. This may already be familiar to you from
the most famous studio compressor for bassists, i.e. Urei LA2A, which functions
according to the same principle.
After any possible compression, Drive provides the option to take the bass sound to
the next level. Saturating the signal takes place depending on the frequency: In spite
of a possibly high level of distortion, the basses remain relatively clean and contoured.

172
www.magix.com
The equalization stage offers 4 frequency ranges, whereby the two mid bands are
variable. The final master volume controller specifies the volume of the final stage. As
with the guitar amp, the end tubes are also engaged in this case as much as remains
sensible.
Rack effects (FX1/FX2)
There are effects that don't always work well before the amp, e.g. reverb or delay,
especially when they are distorted. Normally, these effects are better placed at the
end of the signal chain.
For final processing and enriching, we offer two separate studio-quality effects units
just like real 19" rack devices.
Many algorithms create a stereo signal. Take care that the sequencer track operates
the duct in "stereo" mode.

Effects units may be selectively operated one behind the other (serial) or parallel.
Switching may be changed via the mode switch.
The following algorithms & effects are available:
• Mono delay (msec & tempo sync): Possibly a simple delay with free selection of
delay time or synched to the sequencer tempo with a musical raster. In case of
high feedback values, a reduction of the damping frequency is required to provide
naturalness to echoes.
• Stereo delay (msec & tempo sync): Like mono delay; features two models.
Repetitions may take place on separate channels (feedback controller to the right:
dual delay) or in ping-pong mode (controller to the left), whereby the signal
alternates between the sides.
• Chorus: Produces a typical "floating/shimmering sound" by modulated detuning
of a signal to "thicken up" its sound or spread it across the stereo field. Detuning
is achieved by a short delay, the length of which can be varied by the modulation.
This produces the so-called "Doppler" effect and broadens the signal.
• Flanger: Algorithmically similar to chorus, but different in that the delay time is
significantly lower and delay works with repetitions (feedback). A flanger sounds
more "cutting" and up-front than a chorus.
• Phaser: A modulation effect just like chorus & flanger, but in this case no
detuning takes place. Filter components periodically alter the signal's "phase
response" (principle of the "phase shifter"). Characteristic notches are produced
in the frequency spectrum response (comb filter effects).
• Room reverb/hall reverb: Reverb offers realistic simulation of realistic
reverberation. Room creates the impression of a small to mid-sized recording
room, while Hall produces the sound impression of a concert hall. A particular is
that both effects algorithms provide a modulation parameter, which may remove

Audio effects 173

possible resonance at low dosages and can produce a soft chorus effect at higher
values.
• LoFi: This algorithm gives the sound a little bit of "grit", or a certain measure of
signal destruction depending on its setting. Turn down the internal sample rate as
much as you like to steal a few bits from the sound's resolution. This is definitely
unconventional...
• Vintage compressor: Ideal for thickening up the signal a little. The algorithm
emulates an older popular circuit design that is similar to studio legends like the
Urei 1176 or simple compressor pedals. A so-called "FET building block" controls
the volume via the input level simply, effectively, and quite musically, as well as
the set compression ratio and the attack and release.
• 3-band EQ: This sound controller works like a conventional mixer with controller
for bass, highs, and two controllers for the (variable) mids. This adds the final
polish to your sound.

174
www.magix.com
Video and Bitmap Objects
Video and bitmap formats
MAGIX Music Maker 2013 can load and export videos in the following formats: AVI,
Windows Media (*.wmv, *.asf), MAGIX Video (*.mxv) and Quicktime Movie (*.mov).
Graphics can be loaded and exported in BMP and JPEG formats. Also RTF text files
can be loaded and used as subtitles.
On the content media you will find the included image and video files. You can also
use your own files or even record your own videos.
To get the best results with video effects, you should save the video and bitmap files
used in True Color (24-bit color).
Video monitor
The video monitor can be opened by clicking on this button or
pressing the F3 key.


Both video monitors can even be positioned
freely on the screen and adjusted for size.
To adjust the size, right-click on the monitor
screen and select the size you want in the
context menu or make your own (user-
defined). Please note that larger video
monitors require more computing power.
The video monitor's size can be increased to the full size of the screen by double-
clicking on the video monitor or by pressing Alt-Enter. You can end fullscreen by
pressing Escape (Esc). Apart from the video monitor size, you can also add a large
time display on the video monitor. Select “display play time” in the context menu and
the current playback marker position is displayed on the video monitor. Foreground
color, background color and transparency are selectable
Audio peakmeter
The video monitor is transformed into an analyzer which displays the
sound as a graphic.

Shortcut: Shift + F4

Video and Bitmap Objects 175

Overview

In the Overview mode, you can view the whole arrangement and you
are also able to access any object you want in a split second; zoom in
directly to the video monitor or move around the clip displayed in the
arranger.
Shortcut: Shift + F2
Infobox

The InfoBox mode shows help text in the preview monitor if you hold
the mouse pointer over a button on the screen.
Shortcut: Shift + F1
Loading and editing videos and bitmaps
Video and image objects can be loaded and edited just like other objects. In order for
you not having to decide which file is to be loaded, you can use the preview function
on the video monitor. Simply click on a video or graphics file in the Media Pool: The
corresponding video or graphic is displayed or played in the video monitor.
• Via the context menu (right mouse-click into the list) you can choose between
different views ("List", "Details", "Large symbols"). In the "Large Symbols" view
the videos are displayed with a preview frame – very useful to preview the
available images.
• If you want to use the video for your arrangement, drag the video or bitmap file
onto a track in the arranger while holding the mouse key. During playback in the
arranger, the entire video and image material on all tracks, including all effects, is
played back in real-time.
• Video and image objects can be edited in the same manner as other objects: You
can touch and move them with the mouse, fade them in or out with the handles
at the top corners, or change their brightness with the middle handle, etc. Please
also read the chapter "Arranging objects (view page 50)".
Simplify object presentation
With the TAB key you can switch between two object presentations. The objects in
the alternative presentation are not displayed frame by frame in the arranger, but in
simplified form. This saves working memory and improves overall play performance.
Scrolling and zooming in the arranger as wee as various object manipulations are far
quicker in TAB mode. The video display in the video monitor is not influenced by the
simplified object display.

176
www.magix.com
Video scrubbing
The scrub mouse mode is particularly useful for quickly finding certain positions
within a video. To do this, activate the scrubb mode in the mouse mode bar and drag
the mouse pointer over a video object while holding down the mouse key. The video is
played back according to the speed and position of the mouse, including all effects.
Extract sound from videos
Video with sound material appears in the arranger on two tracks as two objects (an
audio object and a video object). The two objects automatically form a group.
To edit the video and audio material separately from one another, the objects can be
separated with the Ungroup (view page 213) function in the "Edit" menu or button in
the arranger. Now you can replace the audio or the video track, or process each file
separately. Rejoin/regroup the tracks with the ”Export arrangement” function.
Video effects
All video effects work in real time. In principle, almost any combination of effects may
be assigned to any video or image object: For example, mix mode stanzas with a false
color effect and a double playback velocity.
By overlaying of multiple videos or bitmaps, MAGIX Music Maker 2013 proceeds
from the bottom up. The background video object must be placed in the upper track.
It will be overlaid by and mixed with objects lying below.
Example, if you want to put a dancer on a landscape, place the landscape on track 1,
the dancer on track 2 and activate the Blue Screen effect for the dancer.
Video effects are stored in the ”Video FX” directory. Open the directory by clicking
"Templates" in the Media Pool. All video effects have a preview function and can be
dragged & dropped on a video object into the Arranger.
Title Editor
Text objects and title templates
MAGIX Music Maker 2013 includes a function which simplifies insertion and editing
of titles. Titles are shown as text in music videos, usually animated, for example to
display the artist and song names.
The basis of these titles is the titles templates settings in the "Templates", and these
may be reached via the "Titles" button. To integrate a title template into your project,
proceed as follows:

Video and Bitmap Objects 177

• Select a file. As usual, a simple click generates a preview in the video window.
This way, you can see how certain title settings will look and the effect they will
have in advance.
• Once you’ve found the right title for your purposes, drag & drop it onto a track in
the arranger. It will now be displayed there as a title object. Several title
templates (e.g. YouTube templates) contain additional image objects, these titles
require two tracks.
• The title editor (see above) opens automatically. You can open it again later by
double clicking (or by right clicking in the context menu below "Title Editor").
Video Compression
Compressed video data is typically saved in AVI files. AVI stands for ‘Audio and
Video Interleaved’, i.e. mixed picture and sound. Depending on the compression rate,
high data rates will be required – a good video starts at about 2 MB per second,
equivalent to compression of about 1:10 as opposed to uncompressed video with 20
MB per second data flow rate. High quality video systems only work with a
compression of 3 or 2 – i.e. creating up to 10 MB per second data for video flow. Even
uncompressed video can be used. MAGIX Music Maker 2013 can also process such
high-resolution video data completely. Within MAGIX Music Maker 2013, video data
is processed in uncompressed format – all effects, mixes etc are carried out in the
highest quality. It is possible that replay of a project with several videos or realtime
effects may ‘jump’ more than is the case with smaller videos. This does not harm the
end result though – video export is calculated frame by frame.
General notes on AVI videos
The AVI format (Audio Video Interleaved) isn't actually a proper video format!
Rather, it is a so-called "container", where the conventions for transferring audio and
video files to the program are only loosely defined. The codec (coder/decoder)
actually defines what storage format is used. A codec compresses audio/video data
into its own unique format which can only be read by the codec itself and is decoded
when the film is played.
In concrete terms, a computer-generated AVI file can only be loaded by and played
on a different computer if the same codec is installed on it.
Many codecs (e.g. Intel Indeo
®
video) have now become standard components of the
Windows™ installation. Others like the popular DivX codec are not standard. If you
are generating an AVI file for future play on another computer using one of these
codecs, you should first install this codec on the other PC. The best method available
is to copy the codec installer to your export directory and burn it every time you
create a video disc (slideshow disc) for play on computers.

178
www.magix.com
You may encounter some problems when using older video editing cards with codecs
which only function with the card’s hardware. Such AVIs can only be used on the
computer which was used to create them. Try to avoid using this kind of codec.

Mixer 179

Mixer

MAGIX Music Maker 2013 includes a real-time mixer with a master effects section
that professionally mixes all the tracks within an arrangement. The Mixer can be
opened by pressing the "M" key or via the toolbar in the main window (also: "View"
menu > "Mixer").
The Mixer displays eight tracks simultaneously by default. With the «/» buttons
beside the scroll bars at the bottom, the Mixer can be increased or reduced in size.
You can view further tracks using the scroll bar.

The limiter, which prevents overmodulation, can then be
connected.

Fader
Every channel has its own volume or brightness fader. As a result, the volume can be
lowered quickly and accurately, to add more bass or to fade out a video that is just
playing. This fader also acts on any linked MIDI files.

The stereo position for each track can be defined with the Pan
controls.
The "Solo" button switches a track to solo mode, i.e. all other tracks are muted. Mute:
The mute button mutes the active track.
Double clicking on each of the controls resets it to the passive basic setting, in which
no processor output is needed.

180
www.magix.com
Control groups
The volume, panorama, and FX send faders of the various tracks can be compiled into
control groups. To do this, first click on a fader and then, while holding down "Ctrl",
click on all other faders that you wish to include in your group. If you select "Shift", all
faders in between the first one selected and the next one will be grouped.
Now you can set the volume of multiple tracks together without having to change the
volume ratios of the tracks. For example, you can set the volume of an individual
instrument of a drumset (kick, snare, HighHat) in such a way that they can harmonize
with one another. Now, if you group together the volume faders of the tracks, you can
set the master volume of the drumset.
To ungroup a fader from a control group, click the instrument and press "Ctrl" again.
There may only be one control group active at a time, creating a new group
automatically deactivates an existing group.
Track effects
Besides the object audio effects, a separate track effects rack with equalizer,
reverb/echo, compressor as well as the Vintage Effects Suite plug-ins can be used.
There is also a separate 6-channel parametric equalizer (view page
139) that may be opened via the small EQ button beside the panorama
controller.
The plug-ins are loaded via the plug-in slot.

You can open the track audio effects rack with the FX button.
A bright blue track effects button signifies that effects are active in the track.
The track effects can also be applied without having to open the mixer.

The arranger's trackbox (view page 31) also features the track FX
menu. In it, you will find presets for track effects (view page 134)
sorted according to the instrument type.
Track effects always apply to all audio objects of a track. In comparison to applying an
effect to each object individually, this saves storage space. The effect itself works the
same way as object effects. For more information on using and controlling the
individual effects, please read the chapter Audio effects (view page 132).

Mixer 181

VST and DirectX audio plugins
MAGIX Music Maker 2013 supports VST and DirectX audio plug-ins. Most of these
are effects modules such as reverbs, equalizers and so on, but there are also many
software synthesizer modules as well as other types of controller modules. Thanks to
their standardized formats, these plug-ins can also be used in the mixer section of
MAGIX Music Maker 2013.
Before DirectX plug-ins can be used, the DirectX system needs to be installed on your
computer. Manual installation is rarely required as most Windows installations
include DirectX. If, however, your computer does not have DirectX or just an older
version, you can use the up-to-date DirectX installer provided on the MAGIX Music
Maker 2013 installation CD.
Naturally, the DirectX plug-ins themselves also need to be installed before they can
be used! Installation procedures may vary from plug-in to plug-in.

Two so-called slots for track effects are located in the channel strip of
the mixer for the corresponding track as well as in the FX tracks.
Clicking on the small triangle will let you select an effect from the list. Select "No
effect" to remove a plugin from the slot. A left-click temporarily disables the plug-in.
Active plug-ins are displayed in light blue. Right-clicking on the slot opens the settings
dialog of the plug-in.
FX tracks
Two FX send controllers (FX1 and FX2) are located below the plugin slots.
You can determine the volume at which you want the signal to be routed to the two
available FX tracks.
An FX track is a complete, additional mixer track which provides a complete track FX
rack and two plugin slots for use as a send effect.
A send effect differs from a normal effect found in the track (Insert) insofar as it can
edit the signals from multiple tracks or objects simultaneously.
The FX are usually hidden in the Mixer. They will be displayed as soon as one of the
FX send controllers is used.

182
www.magix.com
In the first FX track the hall function is activated as standard as it is the most
important application of the send effects.
The volume controllers serve to regulate the volume of the FX track and corresponds
to the old AUX return controller. The mute button is used to switch the FX function
on and off. The solo button enables you to single out FX individual tracks. The peak
meter of the tracks, which send to the FX track, are displayed in grey.
Live monitoring

Click the speaker button in a mixer channel to activate "low latency" monitoring.
Instead of the objects, the channel now plays the audio signal arriving at the sound
card’s input – through all the channel’s effects and without latency! This also applies
to the AUX and master effects.
You can now add effects to your vocal or instrumental performance while recording
them, and you can ‘jam’ along to a complete arrangement in real-time. (Please note
that this only works during recording and playback, not while the arrangement is
stopped.)
This monitoring method requires an ASIO driver to be installed. ASIO drivers are
usually supplied with professional sound cards. For all cards without a proprietary
driver, MAGIX has included a MAGIX Low Latency driver. This provides an ASIO
driver for any sound card (or on-board sound chip) that can use WDM drivers. For
further information, please refer to the chapter "Menu File – Settings/Information –
Playback parameters…"
The MultiMax effect has a high-latency design, which is why it is deactivated during
live monitoring.
Master track
The FX button and the plug-in slots function exactly like in the tracks. The FX button
will open the Master Audio Effect Rack. The complete mixer settings including the FX
tracks can be reset with the "FX reset" button.
Both faders control the total volume.
Link button: If you deactivate the Link Button, you can control the
volume of the right and left channels individually.
Master limiter: Effectively prevents overmodulation.

Reprocess arrangement 183

Reprocess arrangement
Export wizard
The export wizard can be opened through "File" > "Export" > "Common export
options".
This bundles different options for exporting your arrangement in different formats, for
burning onto CD, or publishing on the Internet with different platforms.

Export as MP3: This selection exports the arrangement in the popular MP3 format for
use on the Internet or on mobile playback devices (MP3 players, mobile phones, etc.).
More details about the export dialog are provided in the "Export" (view page 191)
section of the "File menu" chapter.

184
www.magix.com
Burn to CD/DVD: This selection exports the arrangement in the best possible quality
and opens an additional program for burning an audio CD. The option is also available
to backup the entire arrangement with all involved files onto CD or DVD. See Burn
audio CD (view page 189).
Upload to MAGIX Online Album laden: Uploads the arrangement to MAGIX Online
Album. This platform enables friends and acquaintances to experience your work. The
MAGIX Online Album online player may also be embedded into any other websites.
More information about MAGIX Online Album is available in the"File menu" (view
page 199)
Publish on Facebook: You can send the arrangement directly to your Facebook
profile. It will then appear as a post on your wall.
Publish on YouTube™: This selection uploads the arrangement as a music video to
YouTube. To use video in MAGIX Music Maker 2013 read the chapter Video and
Image Objects (view page 174). More info about YouTube export is available in
"Export to YouTube" (view page 187) in this chapter.
Publish on Soundcloud: The arrangement will be uploaded to Soundcloud. Additional
info about this innovative music environment can be found in the Upload audio to
Soundcloud (view page 188) chapter.
Send by email: Converts the arrangement into Windows Media and adds it as an
attachment to an email. An email program (e. g. Outlook Express) must be installed
and setup.
Note: You cannot use this function if you only access your email through a browser.
However, you could invite others to listen to your uploaded music via email to your
MAGIX Online Album or Youtube™. To do so, you will have to use the functions of
the respective website (for MAGIX, this is MAGIX Online Media Manager).
Export as E-Mail attachment
The option "Send arrangement as email" in the "File" > "Export" menu creates a file in
the Windows Media format. Your mail program is activated simultaneously and the
created file is added as an attachment of an opened message. Thus, any arrangement
can be compressed without intermediate steps and sent as an email immediately.
Export as ringtone
With MAGIX Music Maker 2013 you can produce your own individual ringtone
melodies. Once completed, export the arrangement using the "Audio as
Wave/ADPCM" or "Audio as MP3" option in the File menu under "Export". Exactly
which format to choose can vary depending on the capabilities of your phone.

Reprocess arrangement 185

Take a look at the "File menu"chapter for more information on the audio export dialog
and the for specific export format settings.
Some advice on creating ring tones
Audio material: When designing your ring tone please take into account that the
loudspeakers of your mobile phone can only poorly reproduce bass tones. High tones
are also heard more easily in a loud environment. If your ring tone includes MIDI
Objects, you should activate VST Instruments on the respective tracks in the
arrangement, so that MIDI information included in your ring tone becomes audible.
Some manufacturers offer VST effects which simulate the loudspeaker of your mobile
phone on the PC.
Length: Typical ring tones have a length of about five to sixty seconds. MAGIX Music
Maker 2013 lets you create longer ring tones; however, you should note that large ring
tone files require sufficient memory in your mobile phone.
File format: First, select a format suitable for your mobile phone from the Export
dialog. If several formats are possible, please note that the resulting audio quality will
vary. In general, the quality increases in tandem with the size of the file. If your mobile
does not support stereo audio playback, you can activate the "mono" export option
which reduces the required memory space by about half. The size of the file that will
be generated using your current settings is displayed in the Export dialog.
Transferring the ringtone to your mobile phone: Depending on the type of mobile
phone and the items included in delivery there are several possibilities to transfer your
ringtone from the PC to the phone:
1. Wireless via infrared (IrDA) or BlueTooth link
2. Using a data cable and, if applicable, the transfer software supplied by the
manufacturer
3. By WAP or MMS
Transfer with Bluetooth
Note: The procedure described here refers to Windows XP with Service Pack 2!
Dialogs may be different depending on the Bluetooth driver and operating system
version, or their order may vary (e.g. for password allocation) when transferring to
your mobile phone. However, the process is usually similar if other drivers are used.
Read more on this in the help files or the corresponding chapters of your operating
system's manual and Bluetooth adapter.
• Should you own a Bluetooth device, you can export the movie straight to your
device. For this to happen, your device and your PC must both have Bluetooth
interfaces. If you system has a Bluetooth device, you can activate the Transfer via
Bluetooth option

186
www.magix.com
• After converting the movie into the desired format, the Bluetooth file transfer
assistant opens.
• The first time you try to transfer files to your device via Bluetooth, you have to
specify your device as the receiver in the dialog by clicking on the Browse...
button and selecting your device. The name of your device in the Bluetooth
network is specified in the Bluetooth settings of the device. Check your device
manual for this. Select your device and confirm your choice by pressing "OK".
• Now enter a password of your choice, which you will later have to confirm on
your device and click on the "Continue" button in the assistant. Since connections
between multiple Bluetooth devices can be set up simultaneously in a room, the
password serves to identify certain connections as well as to safeguard your data.
The order can also be the other way around depending on the Bluetooth device
driver, and the device will then request a password which must be confirmed on
your computer. It's important that you use the same password in each case.
• You may be asked once again to enter the file name and path of the movie. In this
case we recommend, when exporting the file, using a folder that you will be able
to find again quickly (for example, "...My Files/My Videos").
• Click on "Browse...".Now, in the assistant, click on the "Continue" button. In the
assistant, click on the "Continue" button.
• Next, you may have to activate the reception of files on the device and re-enter
the password. Afterwards, the transfer of the videos will begin automatically.
• Once the transfer has been completed successfully, "1 new message" will display
on your device. Read more on how to save and play videos in the corresponding
device manual.
Note: We only recommend activating data reception via Bluetooth on your device
once this function is actually required, for example, for transferring files. Once you
have completed the uploading process you should deactivate Bluetooth again, as
permanently activated Bluetooth reception can constitute a security risk!
Transfer with Infrared
For devices with infrared interfaces, the transmission of movies works similarly to
using the Bluetooth transfer method. To do this, your PC and your device have to have
infrared interfaces. Many notebooks are already fitted with such IrDA interfaces.
• Before starting the export, an infrared connection must already be established
between the computer and the device. Activate the infrared interface on your
device and establish the connection to your computer. You can check if a
connection has been established via a corresponding symbol in the task bar.
More information on this can be found in the Windows help under the keyword
"Wireless connection".

Reprocess arrangement 187

Note: Some devices deactivate the infrared interface when no data is exchanged
after a certain amount of time. In this case, you can search for the exported movie in
the Media Pool again, reactivate the infrared interface of your device, open the
context menu of the file, and then send the video to your device again by clicking
"Transfer".
• Open the "Export" dialog via the export button, and under "Play after export",
select the option "Export with infrared". Confirm with "OK". A window will now
be displayed which informs you of the current status of the transmission.
• Once the transfer has been completed successfully, "1 new message" will display
on your device. Read more on how to save and play videos in the corresponding
device manual.
Community upload
The menu entries featured under "File" > "Export" >"Community upload" or via the
Export assistant allow you to upload the finished song to different web communities.
Export to Facebook
You can export your arrangement from MAGIX Music Maker 2013 directly to
Facebook.
The command opens a dialog where the arrangement name (displayed according to
the settings in MAGIX Music Maker 2013), a description and search words (tags) can
be entered. After confirming this data with "OK", the arrangement will be exported
and uploaded to Facebook. For connecting and transmitting the video file, you must
login with your Facebook username and password. If you aren't registered on
Facebook, first open your browser and create a Facebook account.
After a successful upload, your browser will open to show you your video's info page
so you can check the entered data once again. If everything is as you want it, you can
leave the page and the new video will now appear in the list of your own videos.
Export to YouTube
You can upload your arrangement to YouTube
®
directly from within MAGIX Music
Maker 2013.
You can find this function in the menu "File -> Export -> Youtube".
The command opens a dialog where you can set the name of the arrangement for
YouTube (default is the same as in MAGIX Music Maker 2013), description,
keywords (so-called "tags"), and the category for the video. After submitting this data
by pressing "OK", the arrangement is exported and uploaded to YouTube
®
. This is
why you have to enter your YouTube
®
account access data (username, etc.) to

188
www.magix.com
connect to YouTube
®
. If you don't have an account open your browser and go to
YouTube
®
to sign up for an account first.
If uploading was successful, your browser will open the info page for the video you
just uploaded to YouTube
®
to double check your description and tags. If everything
looks correct, just leave this page and the new video is already listed under your
videos. YouTube
®
takes some time to process the video for online presentation, but
after this period you and every web user around the world will be able to watch it.
Title templates for YouTube
If your arrangement does not contain a proper video, then you can still upload it to
YouTube
®
with an attractive still image.
In the Media Pool, under the setting "Templates" you will find the subfolder
"YouTube" under the "Title". This contains spezial title templates for use with
YouTube videos. These templates feature neutral designs or match the style of the
Soundpool (hip hop, rock etc.), and contain standard text for artists, title, album, and
comments. These titles also appear throughout the entire length of the arrangement.

Upload song to Soundcloud
Soundcloud is a community that is especially designed for musicians. The free version
provides 120 minutes of storage space for your songs. Every song may be embedded
as a player widget into external websites; the widget even allows comments along the
timeline of the song and an optional download of the original song.
If you have an Internet connection, then you will see the Soundcloud player here
For more information about the possibilities provided by the Soundcloud community
and the different premium accounts see www.soundcloud.com
http://www.soundcloud.com.

Reprocess arrangement 189

Additional editing
You can send your arrangement directly into other MAGIX programs for further
editing. In the "Mixdown" menu you can find the applications available in Music
Maker.
MAGIX Music Maker 2013 Premium lets you use your arrangement
• as background music in slideshows and videos
• to be added to an existing music collection, for example in MAGIX MP3 deluxe 17
• to be edited with an external editor such as MAGIX Audio Cleaning Lab 17 deluxe
Note: to use this function, the corresponding MAGIX program must be installed. If
this is not the case, not all options may be available. You can find out which
programs are necessary for each option in the Edit Manu (view page 225) chapter.
Burn audio CD
To burn an Audio CD, export your arrangement as a wave file: Click on "File" and
select the "Export arrangement" option > "Audio as Wave/ADPCM". The WAV file
created can be burned as an Audio CD with any burn program.
In the Premium version, the burner program <goyaburn> as well as the <Music
Editor> are at your disposal. You can load your arrangement into the MAGIX Music
Editor with the help of the option from the menu command: "File" > "Export
arrangement" > Burn arrangement on audio CD-R(W), and burn an audio CD using
this CD mastering tool. Or you can open <goyaburn>, for example, with the help of
the context menu in the Media Pool. An MP3 data CD can also be created with
<goyaburn>.

190
www.magix.com
File Menu
New arrangement
A new MAGIX Music Maker 2013 arrangement is created with this menu item, with
16 tracks. More tracks can be added via the menu “Edit”.
Shortcut: Ctrl + N
Load arrangement
A previously saved MAGIX Music Maker 2013 arrangement is loaded with this menu
item. Please note that the object files for the arrangement must also be available!
MAGIX Music Maker 2013 will look for the sounds and videos that were used first in
the path where they were located when the arrangement was saved. If they are not
found there, then the MAGIX Music Maker 2013 Arrangement will look for the
objects in the same directory as the arrangement itself.
Shortcut: Ctrl + O
Save arrangement
The current arrangement is saved under the existing name. If no name has been
selected, then a File requester opens, where the path and name can be defined.
Shortcut: Ctrl + S
Save arrangement as...
A dialog opens where the path and name of the arrangement can be specified.
Shortcut: Ctrl+Shift+S
Import
Import audio CD tracks
You can simply import one or more CD tracks like a regular file from the Media Pool
via drag & drop. If this convenient method fails for some reason, then this menu
command may be accessed via the CD manager to insert tracks from audio CDs
directly into the arrangement. More on this can be found in the section "Importing
Audio CDs (view page 61)" in the "Audio objects" chapter.
Shortcut: C

File Menu 191

Audio recording
See Audio recording (view page 58).
Shortcut: R
Export
Common export options
You will find a quick selection of the most common export options here.
Please read more on this in the section Export wizard (view page 183).
Keyboard shortcut: X
Burn audio to CD-R(W)
With this option the arrangement will be exported as a WAV file and loaded into an
additional program called MAGIX Music Editor. From there it can be burned straight
to disc.
Shortcut: Shift + C
Audio export dialog

File
In File you can enter the file name for you exported file.

192
www.magix.com

Use the folder symbol to select the folder into which you want to export it. The
dialog will remember the export path for future exports.

Use the "home" symbol to restore the original preset (More information can
be found in the section "Folders" on page 209) path.
With "Overwrite file automatically" you can perform multiple exports from the same
file.
Options
Only export the area between the start and end markers: Set the option if you wish
to export only one of the clippings from the arrangement.
Bit rate: The "Bit rate" selection specifies the level of compression: The higher the bit
rate, the higher the quality of the exported audio file. On the other hand, the bit rate
determines the final file size: The smaller the bit rate, the smaller the files.
Mono/Stereo/5.1 Surround: Most mobile devices have only one loudspeaker. To save
on memory, you can export in mono as well. In 5.1 Surround Mode (see Mixer in
Surround Mode) you can also export in MP3surround.
Advanced: Here you can open the advanced settings dialog for the corresponding
audio format (see below).
Normalize: This function should always be activated. It guarantees that the music is
not too loud/overmodulated or too quiet.
Transfer format:
Here you can state whether you want to send he exported arrangement to mobile
devices via Bluetooth, infrared or email. Read more in the Reprocess arrangement
(view page 183)chapter.
Audio as WAV/ADPCM
The audio material is exported as a standard wave file. This is the conventional format
for further use on Windows PCs. These files are not compressed and retain their full
sound quality.
Compression (IMA ADPCM): This option compresses the WAV file in to the
ADPCM format. This format is needed for playing WAV files on mobile phones. A lot
of mobile phones also need a lowered sample rate. (usually 16000 Hz).
Note: You can also export single tracks. TO do so, simply "mute" those tracks that
you don't want. Then, only the active tracks will be exported with this function.
Shortcut: Shift + W

File Menu 193

Audio as MP3
MAGIX Music Maker 2013 supplies an optional MP3 encoder for especially fast, top-
quality conversions into the popular MP3 audio format.
Hint: The MP3 encoder cannot be used as a codec for audio tracks from AVI audio
files.
Transfer format:
Here you can specify how you wish to send the audio file to the mobile device. Read
more on this under Transferring files (view page 184).
Options
In the "Options" section you can set the format and the compression of the audio file.
Bit rate: The "Bit rate" selection specifies the level of compression: The higher the bit
rate, the higher the quality of the exported audio file. On the other hand, the bit rate
determines the final file size: The smaller the bit rate, the smaller the files.
Mono/Stereo/5.1 Surround: Most mobile devices have only one loudspeaker. To save
memory, you can also export in mono. In 5.1 Surround mode (see Mixer in Surround
mode) you can also export in MP3 Surround.
Note: Before you can use the MP3 encoder for MP3 Surround, you will have to
activate it first. Activation is fee-based! For more information, read the Activate
additional functions chapter.
Normalize: This function should always be activated. It guarantees that the music is
not too loud/overmodulated or too quiet.
Shortcut: Shift + M
Audio as Ogg Vorbis
"OGG Vorbis" is a license-free open source audio codec with very good sound
characteristics for comparably small files – similar to the MP3 file format.
In the settings under "Advanced" you can still choose from three various encoder
modes and bit rate. Set quality. Constant bit rate enables streaming and maximum
compatibility; with variable bit rate a better audio quality with the same size files can
be achieved.
Shortcut: Shift + O

194
www.magix.com
Audio as Windows Media
Exports the arrangement in Windows Media Audio format. Please read more on the
advanced settings in the Windows Media Video Export (view page 197) section.
Shortcut: Shift + E
Audio as AIFF
The audio material is exported as an AIFF file. This is the most commonly used audio
format for Apple™ computers.
Shortcut: Shift + I
Audio as FLAC
FLAC is the abbreviation for "Free Lossless Audio Codec". This is a freely savable
format that can be used to compress your audio data to 50% of their original size.
Unlike lossy compression methods like MP3 or OGG, the full sound quality is kept
intact with FLAC.
Shortcut: Shift + F
Audio tracks as single waves
Opens the WAV export dialog with activated "Export single tracks" option. Clicking
on OK saves each track as a separate wave file in the export folder.
Shortcut: Shift + U

File Menu 195

Video export dialog

You can export your arranagement into various video formats. The options on offer
can vary according to the selected format.
Presets: Under "Presets", you'll find the typical settings for the selected format for the
most important applications.
You can save your personal settings by pressing the "Save" button and
remove them by pressing the "Delete" button.
Export settings: You can set up the general export parameters like resolution, page
proportions and frame rate in the dialogs. Select the most-used values from the list
field, to set your own values click on the "..." button. The "Advanced" button opens
the specific settings dialog for selected video format (see below).
In File you can enter the file name for you exported file.

Use the folder symbol to select the folder into which you want to export it. The
dialog will remember the export path for future exports.

Use the "home" symbol to restore the original preset (More information can

196
www.magix.com
be found in the section "Folders" on page 209) path.
With "Overwrite file automatically" you can perform multiple exports from the same
file.
Options
Shut down PC automatically after successful export: Use this option to have the
computer switch off automatically after lengthy export processes.
Only export the area between the start and end markers: Set the option if you wish
to export only one of the clippings from the arrangement.
Play after export: Here you can state whether you want to send he exported
arrangement to mobile devices via Bluetooth, infrared or email. Read more in the
Reprocess arrangement (view page 183)chapter.
Video as AVI
When exporting to AVI video you can set and configure the size and frame rate of the
AVI video and the compression codec for audio (audio compression) and video
(Codec). Please also observe the general information on AVI video formats (view
page 177, view page 196) in the PDF manual.
Shortcut: Shift + A
General info on AVI videos
The AVI format (Audio Video Interleaved) isn't actually a proper video format! It's
rather a so-called container where very general conventions can be specified like
audio and video data and sent to a program. The exact memory format of the files is
specified via the codec (coder/decoder). A codec compresses audio/video files into
its own private format with which only the codec can work and decodes the files on
playback again.
This means that an AVI file created on your computer can only be loaded/played on
computer B if this computer has the same codec installed.
Many codecs (for example, Intel Indeo video) have now become standard
components of the Windows installation, others, such as the popular DivX codec are
not. If you create an AVI file with such a codec and you wish to use it other
computers, install the corresponding codec on them as well.
On older video editing cards certain codecs that function only with the hardware of
the corresponding cards can be problematic. This type of AVI can only be used on the
computer on which they were created. Avoid using this type of codec when possible.
Video as MAGIX video
Exports the project in MAGIX video format.

File Menu 197

This format is used for video recording by MAGIX Music Maker 2013 video software
and is optimized for digitally editing high quality video material.
Shortcut: Shift + X
Video as Quicktime Movie
Exports the movie in Quicktime Movie format. This format enables streaming
playback of audio or video files via the Internet.
Like with Real Media Export, you can make corresponding settings for video size,
frame rate and codecs for Quicktime export. However, the export dialog doesn't offer
the option of saving comments for the video.
Tip: For Quicktime files (*.mov), the Quicktime library must be installed.
Shortcut: Shift +Q
Video as Windows Media
Exports the arrangement in Windows Media format. This is a universal audio/video
format from Microsoft. The setting options in the "Advanced"dialog are
correspondingly complex.
Manual configuration
Audio/Video codec: Various codecs are available, corresponding to the various
Windows Media versions (7, 8 or 9). Should compatibility problems arise on
playback, try an older codec with a lower version number.
Bitrate mode: Constant and variable bitrates are possible; most devices and
streaming applications demand constant bitrate. For VBR two pass modes the movie
is compressed in two passes in order to optimally use the bandwidth for highly-
compressed movies for the Internet.
Bitrate/quality/audio format: The bitrate determines display and audio quality. The
higher this is, the better your videos will look and the larger the files and the required
encoding time will be. For variable bit rates, the bit rate is adapted dynamically to the
requirements of the corresponding picture or sound material. Either the quality value
can be set between 1-100 or, for two-pass encoding, an average or maximum bit rate.
For audio, the bit rate is set additionally by the audio format.
Import from system profile (export type): For the most used methods (other than
playback on mobile devices,for which you should use the supplied presets), like
Internet streaming, etc., Microsoft provides diverse system profiles to choose from. If
you have the Windows Media Encoder 9 installed, which is available from Microsoft
as a free download, you can edit the profiles or create your own. These can be loaded
by pressing the "Import from profile file" button.

198
www.magix.com
Go to Clip info to insert title, author name, copyright details, and a description.
Shortcut: Shift + V
Single picture as BMP
Exports the picture located at the current start marker and displayed in the video
monitor as a bitmap (.BMP) file.
Shortcut: Shift + B
Picture as JPG
Exports the image located at the current start marker and displayed on the video
monitor as a jpeg file.
Shortcut: Shift + J
Sending your arrangement as an email.
This option creates a compressed file in Windows Media format. Your mail program
is activated simultaneously and the created file of an opened message is added as an
attachment. This lets you compress and send your arrangement immediately without
having to go through any intermediate steps.
Backup
Load backup arrangement
Using this command you can load a backup arrangement. Backup arrangements are
created automatically by MAGIX Music Maker 2013 and can be used when, for
instance, a program crashes in order to recover the last status of files. This type of
automatic backup gets the file extension MM_ (underscore). This command is also
useful if you unintentionally saved your change and wish to return to the previous
version.
Save arrangement and used media
With this menu point, you can put a complete MAGIX Music Maker 2013
arrangement, including all used multimedia files into one folder. This is especially
useful when you wish to reuse or archive such an arrangement later on or when the
files can be found on multiple CDs so that on loading you continually have to change
CDs. Furthermore, the effect files used are saved in one folder with the other files.
A dialog opens where you can specify the path and name of the arrangement.
Shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + S

File Menu 199

Save arrangement and used media (audio as OGG Vorbis)
You can create a backup copy as an OGG file, whereby all audio files used will be
compressed into OGG format. This way you can compactly archive your song or put it
on the web as a remix kit.
Shortcut: Ctrl + Shift + C
Burn arrangement and used media onto CD/DVD-R(W)
Use this option to burn the arrangement as well as all the relevant files to CD or DVD.
Even larger arrangements can be burned straight to disc. The arrangement, if
necessary, will then be split up and burned automatically to multiple discs. A restore
program which is burned to the first disc of such a backup, guarantees easy re-
recording of the backup.
Shortcut: Ctrl + B
Burn manually selected files to CD/DVD-R (W)
Opens MAGIX Speed burnR to burn videos or other files onto CD/DVD. File selection
is done via drag & drop from MAGIX Speed burnR's Explorer.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + B
Internet
MAGIX Online Album
In the MAGIX Online Album, you can post your favorite photos online and then send
the link to your friends. All photos are immediately available from anywhere in the
world on a professionally-designed photo website, in well-organized photo galleries,
as full-screen slideshows, or in the form of a personal photo e-card.
• Personalized photo website in many designs.
• Unique Internet address (URL).
• Upload your pictures directly from a camera phone, send the link, and share the
picture with other camera phone users.
• Full-screen online slideshows with fade effects and music.
• Send custom designed e-cards with your own photos.
• Share your photos with friends, including Internet management and password
access to private albums.
Your photos online
MAGIX Online Album is available in three versions, of which the smallest (the FREE
album with 500MB webspace for your photos) is entirely free.

200
www.magix.com
The larger versions (CLASSIC or PREMIUM) are available for a monthly charge, but
also come with many handy features, such as a faster website, 2,000 MB or 5,000
MB storage space, more website designs or access by mobile phone/PDA.
More information about prices and included services is available at www.magix-
photos.com.
Just three easy steps: Within minutes your first pictures will appear on the Internet:
1. Select photos
Choose your favorite photos directly from the program and optimize them in just a
few clicks. Put completed photo albums together and integrate music of your choice.
Do it all offline on your PC - saves you money! Then select "Services" from the
program's menu bar "MAGIX Online Print Service -> Send selected".
2. Upload photos
In order to upload photos to your MAGIX Online Album simply log in using your
email address. Naturally, access is protected via your personal password.
If you still don't have access, click on Register now! to activate your own album in
just a few minutes. Then off you go!
3. Done! Your own personal photo website is finished
and your best photo memories are on the net. As a photo gallery or fully automatic
slideshow (fullscreen).
Now, invite all your friends with just one click or show your photos on the road using
your WAP-compatible camera phone.
Using your MAGIX Online Media Manager, you can quickly manage your photo
website, upload photos and music, create new albums, add designs and text, and
much more. All online without even having to download any extra software!
Worldwide, easy, and quick in just a few clicks. At http://www.magix-photos.com
The following options are also available:
Send e-cards and photo emails
Send your photos as unique e-cards with great designs, or as a photo email to your
friends and acquaintances.

File Menu 201


Order photo prints and gifts
Order paper prints or great photo gifts from your MAGIX Online Album and have
them delivered directly to your home, or pick them up from a photo lab in your area.
Delivery time is usually just 2 - 3 days.
Download media
This command loads files from MAGIX Online Album to your PC.
Open my online album...
This command opens your own MAGIX Online website. You must login and enter the
page's Internet address (URL) to continue.
MAGIX Website Maker
Not only is Internet surfing easy! Thanks to MAGIX Website Maker creating websites
also becomes child's play!
This service offers:
• Your desired domain (www.desiredname.com) and a subdomain (http://your-
name.magix.net/website).
• 250 MB memory space with 5 email accounts, 1 GB each.
• Website Maker with website templates, intros. Also animations, text effects,
form and design objects, picture and graphic templates, and buttons. And
everything without any ad banners!
• Photo (*.jpeg), video (*.wmv) & music (*.mp3) options.
• Additional software: MAGIX web mail for managing your email inbox.
MAGIX Website Maker offers 3 months of free, non-binding service. This way, you
have enough time to find out everything about MAGIX Website Maker and all
existing possibilities for editing and managing your homepage.
MAGIX Website Maker offers everything for the perfect Flash website:
• Design templates: Numerous high-quality website templates in the latest
professional Flash
®
design with pre-finished, customizable subpages, start pages,
profile pages, photo pages, video pages, and much more.
• Text & text effects: Freely positionable text fields with fantastic fonts and
animated text effects can be added and individually formatted with ease.

202
www.magix.com
• Multimedia content: Select your favorite photos, spectacular slideshows, videos
and an online video player with your own background music, or integrate it all as
an online music player with playlists.
• Decorative elements: Attractive design objects, plenty of vector shapes,
background images, buttons, and much more offer more possibilities for
designing unique websites than ever.
• Animation objects: Large selection of dynamic, impressive animation objects for
breathtaking, moving websites.
• Links: Easily add links to your own or external websites.
• Top extras: Enhance your website with a visitor counter, guest book, contact
form, and many other useful extras.
Export function: Conveniently add individual components of your website (e.g.
video player, slideshow, online music player) or even the entire website to
external sites as an embedded website.
Proceed as follows:
After registering your desired domain, you can start creating your website right away.
1. First, select a design for your website in MAGIX Website Maker
2. If you would like to place an intro (start animation) at the start of your domain,
select your intro as a next step.
3. Now you can replace the mock text with your own text as you see fit. All free-
standing elements on all webpages can also be moved as you please. To do so,
click to select the element and move it using your mouse.
4. Once everything is just how you want it, you can put your page online, so that
your domain can be accessed.
Catooh – the Online Content Library
Catooh provides you with high-quality photos, videos, and music for every theme,
expanded by intelligent iContent with professional Soundpools, DVD menu
templates, and brilliant MAGIX ShowMaker styles to help you make your photo,
video, and music projects reality. All of this is available directly from your MAGIX
software.
Just choose "Share" from the menu "Catooh" to set up an Internet connection.
Browse through the thematically sorted categories or view the results directly by
entering a keyword. After downloading, you can drag the objects from the Media Pool
directly into your arrangement.
Tip: Read the introduction online http://rdir.magix.net/?page=JRF6LASAR2Z3!
Find media and download in the arrangement...
Opens Catooh and loads your files directly into the arrangement.

File Menu 203

Shortcut: O
Import media backup
iContent (for example, 3D transitions) which you buy and download from Catooh is
stored directly in your central My files\MAGIX Downloads\Backup directory. If you
have downloaded these files from other MAGIX programs, then you can use the
command "Import media backup" to make them accessible for use in MAGIX Music
Maker 2013.
Manage login details
These are options for managing user names (email addresses) and the associated
passwords so that you are able to access your Online Services without having to enter
the details each time.
This information applies to all of my Online Services: If this option is activated, then
the account details you have entered will be applied to all Online Services. Deactivate
this option if you have different details for individual services, then choose the
corresponding service via "Select service and enter the associated login details.
Find out more about MAGIX Online World
Opens an Internet browser at the MAGIX Online World website.
Settings
Arrangement settings
In this dialog, the general properties of the arrangement can be set. Statistical
information about the arrangement is also displayed.
Shortcut: E
General
Name: Here you can enter the name of the current arrangement.
General arrangement settings
Path: This is where you determine the folder on your hard drive in which your
arrangement is saved.
Save automatically: Saves the arrangement automatically according to the settings
used for automatic backups in the program settings.
Use settings as presets for new projects: The settings entered in this dialog are
applied to all new projects.
Number of tracks: Here you can set the number of tracks you want to use.

204
www.magix.com
Audio sample rate: The sample rate determines the pitch and the speed at which
audio objects are played back. The sample rate you can use depends on your sound
card (some sound cards even permit changing the sample rate during playback). The
sample rate you can use depends on your sound card (some sound cards even permit
changing the sample rate during playback). If you halve the sample rate, wave audio
objects are played one octave lower.
Time signature: Several types of bars are available to choose from, for example ¾
beat. With various grid settings you can also set additional time signatures. For
example, with a set 3/4 beat and a 1/8 note grid a 6/8 beat would be the result.
Video resolution: Here you can specify the presets for the video resolution used and
the video format.
Synchronization
Options for Synchronization and ReWire support.
Information
Name/Path: See above
Created on: Displays the time the arrangement was created.
Last changes: Displays the time when last saved.
Number of used objects: Displays the number of all objects in the arrangement.
Used files: Here the names and paths to all multimedia files used in the arrangement
are shown.
Audio recording
See Audio recording (view page 58).
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + R
Program settings
Here you can set MAGIX Music Maker 2013 according to your needs and wishes.
Shortcut: P
General options
Autoscroll: If autoscroll is activated, the screen view automatically shifts when the
playback marker reaches the right edge of the screen, which is particularly useful for
longer arrangements. Scrolling requires constant recalculation of the screen view,
which may lead to interrupted playback if the amount of system RAM is too low. If
this happens, simply deactivate the autoscroll feature.
Simplified Object Display: This option determines whether the objects are displayed
with one or two waveforms. When it is activated, the waveforms are displayed in
stereo, i.e. with a right and left channel.
Shift: Ctrl + Alt + Z

File Menu 205

Automatic saving of backup arrangements: Here you can the time intervals at which
automatic backup arrangements will be saved.
Soundpool
Hide unavailable loops: All Soundpools are saved into a database automatically. The
Media Pool lists all loops saved in the database, i.e. also those which originate from
external media (Soundpool discs) that may not be in the drive at the moment. These
results can be hidden, but this slows down the search results in the Media Pool.
Hide instruments which are left empty in the style selection: Instrument groups for
which there are no loops present in a certain style are completely hidden in the Media
Pool (instead of being grayed out).
Clean up Soundpool: Every detected Soundpool (on CD/DVD or on the hard drive) is
added to the database and displayed there, even if the corresponding medium is
currently not in the drive or if the Soundpool has been deleted or moved. This option
helps to remove these entries in the database.
Reset Soundpool: Deletes the Soundpool database. You have the option of
maintaining the included and installed factory-provided Soundpool in the database.
Hide advanced tooltips: The additional information for the detected loops in the
Media Pool will be hidden.
Instruction dialogs: In its newly installed state, MAGIX Music Maker 2013 displays a
number of security queries at various parts of the program. Every one of them can be
switched off by clicking the small box at the bottom that says "Don't show this
message again". To display these warning messages, select the "Reactivate dialogs"
option.
Program interface
Darken screen when dialogs are opened: Darkening signals modal dialogs which
need to be closed before the rest of the program can be operated. This can be
deactivated if it disturbs you.
Hide news: This option deactivates the MAGIX News Center in the main interface of
MAGIX Music Maker 2013.
Import
Preview samples (Wav, OGG): Preview Wave files while playing the arrangement:
Here you can switch off the preview when a playback is running (Smart preview).
Adapt waves automatically to the BPM: When loading to the arrangement or
previewing, MAGIX Music Maker 2013 tries to adapt the samples to the speed of the
arrangement. This always works properly with newer MAGIX soundpool samples as
the tempo information is saved in the wave file. It usually works with all other loops as

206
www.magix.com
well, provided the loops are clean, that is, they are cut to entire bar lengths (see the
Arranger chapter).
With "For patched samples only", automatic timestretching can be deactivated for all
other samples. With "Apply to longer samples as well", longer samples will also be
adapted if they contain tempo and bar information provided by the Remix Agent.
Remix Agent for the tempo and beat recognition of longer samples (>15 s): Here you
can deactivate the automatic opening of the Remix Agent for longer samples (for
example, CD tracks or MP3s).
Automatically adjust waves to pitch: A wave's pitch can be adjusted automatically
using pitchshifting. For this to work however, the used samples (much like the
samples on the MAGIX soundpool CDs) must have the corresponding key and pitch
information. The pitch of the arrangement will then correspond to the pitch
information of the first sample in the arrangement.
Use destructive adjustment for shorter samples: Usually, loaded samples are adapted
to the arrangement in realtime with timestretching. For computers with lower
processing power, this method can be deactivated – the timestretching effect will
then be calculated into a new file which is copied to the hard disk.
Import CD tracks analog instead of digitally: If this option is activated, you can record
audio CDs via the record button in the transport control. Read more on this in the
"Recording audio CDs" section in the "Audio objects" chapter. (view page 65)
Automatically open MIDI editor during import of MIDI files: The MIDI Editor will
automatically open after the loading of MIDI files, allowing you to make changes to
channel and instrument assignment and other settings.
Start file preview in Media Pool for...: Here you can deselect automatic file preview
start for Media Pool files and certain file types.
Import formats: You can deselect file formats that you never use, and these will no
longer be imported. Please keep in mind that for some file types (AVI, WMA) several
import modules exist, and MAGIX Music Maker 2013 uses the fastest one in each
case. If you experience problems during the import of certain files, you can
experiment with deactivation of certain import modules, forcing the program to use
the slower, but more compatible import module.
Audio
Output device: This option determines which sound card and which output plays
back the wave audio objects and the drivers that should be used.
Advanced: Use these buttons to access the playback options window which provides
information on the current sound card. ASIO provides the settings dialog for the ASIO
driver, e.g. the MAGIX Low Latency ASIO driver.

File Menu 207

Wave/Direct Sound/ASIO/WASAPI: Specifies which of the conventional Windows
wave drivers should be used for the sound card, i.e. the DirectSound system or ASIO.
Starting with Windows Vista, the WASAPI driver model is also an option.
Windows wave drivers have the advantage of being relatively stable against strained
peaks caused by large buffers. If playback becomes jerky as a result of processor-
heavy effects like time-stretching, switching to wave drivers may solve the problem.
Otherwise the system may react more slowly with wave drivers because of the large
buffers, that is, all changes are heard with a delay.
16/24-bit wave/driver communication: If your sound card is able to play 24-bit
audio, your arrangement will be played at this higher resolution (internal 32-bit float
calculation). This is applicable only to wave drivers.
When using live monitoring and when playing and recording VST instruments in real
time, i.e. with as low a reaction time (latency) as possible, it's recommended that you
use ASIO drivers. If your sound cards do not have ASIO drivers, you can use the
MAGIX Low Latency driver.
If you select ASIO as the driver model, you can set the output in the upper list field
(for cards with multiple outputs) and the ASIO driver in the lower list field. Advanced
opens the settings dialog of the ASIO driver. Please refer to the sound card manual for
more information.
WASAPI is a new Windows (native) driver model for low latency and can be used as
an alternative to ASIO drivers. WASAPI is recommended for Windows Vista or later
Windows versions when the sound card does not have its own ASIO driver and the
MAGIX Low Latency driver isn't compatible.
Audio buffer:Here you can specify the buffer size that should be used for playback of
the entire arrangement or for previewing audio files in the Media Pool.
As a rule of thumb: If response and loading times are too slow, reduce the buffer size;
otherwise increase the buffer size if the audio playback is choppy or if real-time effect
computation errors occur.
As error-free playback is usually more important than fast reaction times, the buffer
size should be raised to 16384 or 32768 if dropouts occur.
MIDI
Output device: MAGIX Music Maker 2013 uses an external MIDI device when no
software instruments are applied and to preview MIDI files in the Media Pool. Here
the "Microsoft GS Wavetable SW synth", a standard software synthesizer included in
Windows® as an OS component, should be set as default. If sound cards with their
own synthesizer are used or in case MIDI hardware synthesizers are connected, the
MIDI driver of the sound card or a MIDI interface should be set!

208
www.magix.com
FX: If MIDI playback is too fast or lagging behind, you can enter a speed correction
factor here.
Input device: Lets you select the MIDI driver for your MIDI recording, i.e. the driver
for the MIDI device that is connected to your MIDI keyboard or the driver for your
USB keyboard.
Use MIDI target channel: The MIDI system offers 16 different channels to control 16
different sounds. Normally, MAGIX Music Maker 2013 receives MIDI notes on all
channels simultaneously. With this option, you can select a specific channel. Next you
have to set the desired sound together with the MIDI channel on the device and
select the MIDI recording options on this channel.
Synthesizer latency: Some synthesizers, especially software synthesizers like VST
instruments, create delay during playing, i.e. playback of the sound is delayed when
the key is pressed. This value lets you even this out, causing all notes to be moved
over by a certain temporal value.
Integrate MIDI keyboard with Live Performer: The MIDI keyboard can be used to
remotely control the Live Performer (only in Premium version); see Live Performer
MIDI assignment.
Options
Create "Undo" before destructive editing of audio data: To undo destructive effects,
the original files must be saved to the hard disk. If you use this type of effect quite
often, you can switch off the undo function and save on time used to create an undo
file as well as save space in memory.
Write real-time audio to wave file: If this option is activated, the entire arrangement
can be mixed live and recorded simultaneously. During playback you can, for example,
control mixer fades and effects or, with the help of keyboard shortcuts, you can play
the beats in the arrangement – all activities will be recorded and written to a
separate wave file. Every time playback stops you will be asked if the portion you just
played should be saved as a wave file, loaded into the arrangement, or deleted.
Video
Video standard: PAL is used in Europe, the US and Japan use NTSC. This setting
should not be changed.
Video display: The resolutions that can be set here concern only the picture display of
DV videos in the Arranger. If playback becomes jerky, we recommend entering a
lower value. The quality of exported videos is not influenced by this.
Extract sound from videos during import: If a video contains audio data as well, you
can use this function to extract the audio track from the video. It will be loaded
directly underneath the video track and grouped together with it. If you ungroup them
(in Edit menu), you can edit the sound as an independent object.

File Menu 209

Automatically adjust videos to BPM during import: With the available BPM
information you can automatically create a video in which the rhythm and order of
pictures are synchronized. This does not play all frames of a video, but some are
excluded according to the BPM setting on frame playback. The video appears faster at
a higher BPM setting; it "dances" to the rhythm. The tempo can be set before every
new arrangement in the transport control. Otherwise, the arrangement applies the
BPM tempo of the first sample that is loaded.
Adjust minor deviations from 04:03 aspect ratio during export: This option
automatically customizes photos that have an approximate 04:03 aspect ratio to
04:03 TV screen format. The pictures are therefore easily stretched or compressed.
This inevitably brings about distortions in the picture. If this option is deactivated,
black bars appear along the sides.
Automatically preview exported clips: This option starts the clip immediately after
exporting for verification.
Automatically copy exported material to clipboard: This option is particularly useful
when used with other programs, such as Microsoft PowerPoint. If switched on, the
created multimedia file will be available straight after being inserted.
Video priority: Usually, audio objects have priority over playback. Here, an overloading
of the computer as a result of too many effects can bring about jerky video playback
while the audio continues to play without any problems.
To change this, you can give the video playback precedence over the audio. Video
playback is then renewed after every audio buffer, which may lead to interruptions in
the sound.
Folders
Here you can set the path where
• arrangements will be saved (Arrangements)
• files are exported (Export) or imported (Import), and recordings (Recordings) are
saved,
• files from the Soundpool are loacted (Soundpool)
• your MP3 collection is available (My MP3s)
Keyboard shortcuts
Opens the dialog for editing shortcuts used in MAGIX Music Maker 2013.
Shortcut: U
Language
Here you can change the language used in MAGIX Music Maker 2013. Normally the
language that is used for installation is set as the program language.

210
www.magix.com
Reset Program Settings to Default...
Use this function to reset all program settings (view page 204, view page 203) you
made in MAGIX Music Maker 2013 to their original settings.
Exit
Exits MAGIX Music Maker 2013.
Keyboard shortcut: Alt + F4

Edit Menu 211

Edit Menu
Undo

10 commands can be undone, including object and cursor manipulations. If
you don’t like the result of a change in your arrangement, the Undo function
will take you back to the previous arrangement.
Shortcut: Ctrl + Z
Redo

Redo lets you reverse the last Undo command.
Shortcut: Ctrl + Y
Object
Create a new object
Record a new object
A new audio object is recorded; see Audio recording.
Keyboard shortcut: R
Create a new MIDI object
This function creates a new MIDI object in the current track. After invoking the
function, a pop-up menu opens in which you can choose between an empty MIDI
object or several standard templates.
Shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + N
Text to speech
Please refer to the Audio objects (view page 78) chapter.
Shortcut: Ctrl + Shift + T
Create a new title object
Creates a new title object and opens the title editor (view page 176).
Shortcut: Alt + Shift+ T

212
www.magix.com
Cut
The marked objects are cut out of the current arrangement and placed onto the
clipboard. They can then be inserted at different positions.
Shortcut: Ctrl + X
Copy objects
Objects selected from the current arrangement will be cut out and saved to the
clipboard. They can then be pasted to a different location.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + C
Duplicate objects
This menu option lets you copy all selected objects. The copy appears next to the
original and can be moved easily by holding the left mouse button (drag & drop).
Shortcut: Ctrl + D
Inserting objects
The contents of the clipboard are added into the current arrangement at the position
of the start marker.
The playback marker is positioned at the end of the most recently inserted object so
that the quick and easy multiple use of the command is also possible. Existing objects
now become overwritten.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + V
Inserting multiple objects
This function is similar to "Insert", but you can choose how often the content of the
clipboard is to be inserted.
Shortcut: Ctrl + Numeric pad '+'
Deleting objects
Objects selected from the current arrangement will be deleted.
Shortcut: Del
Split objects
You can cut up a selected object at the S marker position. If you have not selected an
object, all objects will be cut into pieces at the S marker position.
Later on, if you want to re-join the pieces of an object, select “Build group” to join all
selected objects to a group.
Shortcut: T

Edit Menu 213

Save objects as takes
The selected objects are saved in the takes directory. For more about using takes,
please refer to the section „Takes“ (view page 54) in the chapter "Arranging Objects".
Keyboard shortcut: Alt + Shift + S
Grouping
Group objects
Orders all selected objects into groups. As soon as an object is selected in the group,
all objects in the group become highlighted so that you can work on them collectively.
Shortcut: Ctrl + G
Ungroup objects
Any selected objects that are part of an object group will become independent objects
again in this case.
Shortcut: Ctrl + U
Loop range
Set user-defined loop
Normally an object is always looped over the full length of the underlying data
material (audio or video file). To set a clip from a file as a loop, shorten the object at
the front and the back with the handles and choose the menu option "Edit > Object >
Loop range > Insert user-defined loop". This function is very useful for setting your
own recording as a loop, as the silence at the beginning of a recording can be cut
away.
Remove user-defined loop
The user-defined loop length is reset.
Object properties
This function displays all the information about the currently selected objects such as
file name, position on the hard-drive, tempo, etc. More information is available under
Object properties.
Shortcut: Ctrl + P
Track
Add track
A new empty track will be added to the arranger. In the "File > Arrangement
properties" the count of tracks can be set in large increments.
Shortcut: Ctrl + I

214
www.magix.com
Mixdown audio...
This function can combine the arrangement or segments of the arrangement into a
single audio/video object. Please refer to the "Track mixdown" (view page 55) section
in the "Arrange objects" chapter.
Tip: To create the finished end version of the song or video, it is recommended you
select the "Export arrangement" function in the "File" menu instead of the
"Mixdown" function.
Shortcut: Ctrl+Shift+G
Range
MAGIX Music Maker 2013 provides object-based functions as well as "band-
oriented" editing functions. These always refer to the whole arrangement from the
first to the last track as well as to the area between the start and end marker.
Cut range
The section between the in and out points is cut from the current arrangement and
placed on the clipboard. This section can be reinserted elsewhere.
Shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + X
Copy range
The section between the in and out points is copied from the current arrangement to
the clipboard. This section can be reinserted elsewhere.
Shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + X
Insert range
The contents of the clipboard are inserted at the current arrangement's position of the
in point.
Shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + V
Insert segment multiple times
Similar in function to "Insert", but you can stipulate how often the content of the
clipboard is to be inserted.
Shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + Number key
Delete range
The section between the in and out points is deleted from the current arrangement
and not copied to the clipboard.

Edit Menu 215

Shortcut: Ctrl + Del
Extract range
The section between the in and out points is preserved, and all of the material in front
and behind it are deleted. Use this option to isolate a specific part of an arrangement
for further individual editing.
Shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + E
Navigation
Move screen view
Using these commands, a viewable portion together with the start marker will be
moved in the timeline. You can quickly skip between different jump markers and
object edges.
Shortcuts: See keyboard shortcut overview in the Arranger View (view
page 236) section.
Move playback position
This sets the playback marker to the position of a jump marker. This function can best
be used via the keyboard.
When stopped, you can immediately move the playback markers to the position of
the saved jump markers. During playback, the playback marker along with the
playback range will be moved. Here, the old range is always played until the end so
that you can remix your arrangement live once the jump markers have been placed
where you want them without losing the beat.
Shortcuts: 1..0
Set jump marker
This sets a jump marker at the position of the current playback marker. Here you can
note specific parts of the arrangement. With the "Move playback position" function
you can quickly jump to these positions.
Shortcut: Shift + 1...0
Create jump marker sequence
This option duplicates the currently selected playback area between the start and end
markers by setting start markers equidistant to one another in the bar ruler. Now you
can jump to every jump marker using keyboard shortcuts.
Shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + M

216
www.magix.com
Delete all jump markers
Deletes all jump markers
Shortcut: Alt+Shift+M
Select all objects
All objects in the arrangement will be selected.
Shortcut: Ctrl + A

Menu effects 217

Menu effects
Song Maker
This command opens the Song Maker (view page 67) to make arrangements semi-
automatically.
Keyboard shortcut: W
Audio
Please read the chapter "Audio effects (view page 132)" for more details on audio
effects.
Master audio effect rack
Opens or closes the master effects rack; you can also use the "Master FX" button in
the mixer window for this.
Shortcut: B
Text to speech
Please refer to the Audio objects (view page 78) chapter.
Shortcut: Ctrl + Shift + T
Object effect rack
See Object and master effects rack (view page 136).
Shortcut: E
Audio effects
This submenu includes all audio object effects plus the vintage effects and the effects
from the MAGIX Mastering Suite (Premium version only); the latter can be used
individually.
Individual effects can be found in the chapter "Audio effects (view page 132)".
Volume
An assortment of different menu commands which influence the volume of your
audio objects.

218
www.magix.com
Mute/Unmute
Use this command you can mute one or more selected objects. Selecting this
command again makes it audible once again.
Shortcut: Ctrl + M
Set volume
This function, located in both the effects menu and the context menu, controls the
sound volume for individual objects, just like the object handles in the arranger.
Automatic volume damping
This command automatically dampens the volume of other audio objects. This can be
used to insert voiceovers into your arrangement or add commentary to a film (with
the original sound). You can also specify whether you want to dampen the original
sound of existing videos or all soundtracks equally.
In the dialog you can activate and deactivate the value of the dampening.
You can use this command while recording audio (view page 60) (Audio recording,
advanced options).
Shortcut: Ctrl+Shift+D
Normalize
The function "Normalize" raises the level of an audio object to the maximum possible
level without clipping the material. This searches for the largest signal peak in the
audio material and raises the level of the object so that this position matches exactly
0 dB (maximum overdrive).
Shortcut: Alt + N
Tempo and pitch
An assortment of different menu commands which influence the pitch and tempo of
your audio objects.
MIDI transposition
This command is only available for MIDI objects. It increases/decreases the pitch of a
MIDI object's notes by a specific value (in semitones). Use this function, for example,
to adjust the sound of imported MIDI files to other audio objects. This is more
effective than repositioning audio objects (pitchshifting), since this can diminish the
sound; transposition does not diminish the quality of MIDI objects because they are
produced by the synthesizer.
Shortcut: Ctrl + T

Menu effects 219

Timestretch and pitchshift
See Timestretch/pitchshift.
Shortcut: Shift + P
Harmony Agent
The Harmony Agent is designed to analyze harmonies.
Read more on this in the corresponding section of the "Audio Objects (view page
77)" chapter.
Shortcut: H
One pitch higher/lower
You can quickly alter the octave of an included sample without having to access the
corresponding Soundpool folder in the Media Pool.
The "*" and "÷" keys on the numeric keypad (right on the keyboard) place the sample
one level higher or lower.
The "+" and "-" keys on the numeric keypad change the pitch via pitchshifting; the
respective effect in the audio effects rack is utilized for this.
Set pitch
Use this command (only in the Soundpool sample's context menu) to quickly change
the pitch of the selected object (if present). This also functions when working with
multiple selection. Simply select all the objects which are under one another and
select a new pitch to create variations in the arrangement.
Remix
These are the commands for MAGIX Music Maker 2013's remix functions.
Create Remix objects
If, while running the Remix Agent, the tempo and beat information were saved to the
audio file, this command can be used to create remix objects. If the Remix Agent has
not yet been implemented, this command starts it and opens the presets dialog for
creating remix objects.
Shortcut: Ctrl + J
Remix Maker
With the Remix Maker, automatic remixes can be created from Remix Agent loop
objects.

220
www.magix.com
Please refer to the Audio objects (view page 75) chapter.
Shortcut: Shift + K
Tempo & beat recognition
MAGIX Music Maker 2013 provides a Remix Agent for the automatic determination
of the speed in BPM (beats per minute) and for the creation of loop objects.
Please refer to the "<Remix Agent>"chapter.
Shortcut: J
Loop finder
The Loop Finder was developed for the purpose of finding BPMs in short rhythmic
passages and placing BPMs into the arrangement. The Loop Finder can also help to fit
short loops into an existing arrangement or extract short rhythmic passages from
drum loops.
Note: For longer passages (e. g. complete CD tracks), you can use the <Remix
Agent> (view page 69, view page 220).
The waveform of the audio material is displayed in the upper part of the dialog, preset
at a zoom level of about 10 seconds.
The principle involves moving the green start marker to the start of the beat and the
red end marker to the start of the next beat. The BPM display to the left then shows
the tempo of the loop in beats per minute (BPM). Here we presume that there are
exactly the same amount of beats in the selected passage as is displayed in the
"Beats" input field – 4 is the default. If there are two full bars between the start and
end markers, the number of beats has to be increased to eight, otherwise the Loop
Finder will only correlate half the speed.
The precise marking of the beat length is required for exactly defining the loop length.
This is also possible manually by moving the start and end markers, and can be
similarly precise when using the zoom functions. But it's easier to do so using the
following:
Tap tempo: activates the automatic step-sequence to determine the tempo. First,
audio playback begins at the start marker position. Then you will be requested to tap
in the beat with "Tap" or by pressing the "T" key, that is, the "T" key should be pressed
in time with the music. Playback stops after the number of beats set above is reached.
The start marker is now positioned at the start of the tap process and at the end
marker at the end. And that's it! The beat has now been set and the tempo can be
read. Program automation makes sure that the start and end positions are placed

Menu effects 221

exactly at the next beat. Even if the tap process didn't work out exactly, automation
nearly always finds the right beat meant when tapping.
Snap marker: You can use the red and green arrow buttons at the top beside the
wave display for moving the start and end marker one beat forward or one beat back.
This makes it very easy to select "round loops", i.e. whole bars, during running
playback.
As long as a loop runs through without any problems, the correct tempo will be able
to be read to the left.
Here you should make sure that the number of beats per bar (default: 4) has to
adapted to the actual loop length. That means if four bars are selected as a loop, 16
has to be entered into this field.
Start (S) and End (E) Markers: These markers indicate the beginning and the end of a
loop. You can move them around with the mouse to fine-tune the range.
Cut: Once a correct loop has been found, it can be cut using the this function in order
to be able to use it again later.
Use new BPM: The arrangement applies the BPM value found.
Timestretching: Adapts the object to the tempo of the arrangement (as a result of the
determined tempo) using timestretching.
Resampling: Adapts the object to the tempo of the arrangement (as a result of the
determined tempo) using resampling.
Shortcut: L
Load/Save/Reset audio effects
You can save the current effect combination of an audio object separately and apply it
to other objects later. Or you can deactivate all currently used effects entirely (Reset)
if you want to undo the changes.
Keyboard
shortcut:
Load audio effects Ctrl + Alt + O
Save audio effects Ctrl + Alt + S
Reset audio effects Ctrl + Alt + R

Convert stereo into two mono objects
With this option stereo recordings can be split into two mono objects which are then
connected to a group. You can use the "Ungroup" button to edit the channels as
independent objects.
Shortcut: Shift + Z

222
www.magix.com
Edit in external editor
A selected audio object into the external program MAGIX Music Editor where it can
be edited with lots of special features. Once editing has been completed, the edited
material is used in MAGIX Music Maker 2013 instead of the original object.
Shortcut: Ctrl + Shift + M
Video
Edit image in external editor
Graphics files (BMPs or JPEGs) may be edited retroactively with an external graphics
program from the arranger. The selected image file is loaded automatically and, once
editing has been completed, is used in the MAGIX Music Maker 2013 instead of the
original material.
Shortcut: Ctrl+Shift+B
Load video effects
This command enables a saved effects combination to be loaded for the currently
loaded object. If multiple objects are selected, then the effects combination will be
applied to each selected object.
Save video effects
This command saves the current effects combination for each object separately.
Reset video effects
This option allows you to deactivate all currently used effects. The material will be
reset to the state it was in before you applied the effect.
Title
Title Editor
Opens the title editor (More information can be found in the section "Title Editor" on
page 176) for the selected photo or video object.
Shortcut: Alt + Shift + T
Load title template
Use this command to load previously saved title effects for the current object.
Save title template
You can save the current effect combination for each title object separately and apply
it to other title objects later.

View menu 223

View menu
Standard layout
This option determines, whether the video monitor and Media Pool are integrated in
the main window or appear as a separate window which can be closed or opened.
Shortcut: F11
Zoom Soundpool and Keyboard
This setting enlarges the display of the loops in the Soundpool view of the Media Pool.
The keyboard is also shown with a larger display. This makes it easier to use MAGIX
Music Maker 2013 on touchscreens.
Shortcut: Tab
Arranger
Arranger visible
This turns the arranger on and off.
Shortcut: F4
Optimize view

The start marker is set at the beginning of the arrangement and the end
marker is set at the end of the last object in the arrangement, so that the
arrangement may be played back in full.
Zooms out of the arrangement so that the complete duration of the arrangement is
visible. The vertical zoom steps (track height) remain preserved.
Shortcut: F12
Objects with stereo imaging
This option determines whether the objects are displayed with one or two waveforms.
When it is activated, the waveforms are displayed in stereo, i.e. with a right and left
channel.
Shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + Z
Highlight loop area
With this option, you can fade the loop area in and out, visible by the stripe above the
first track that indicates the area that will be played as an endless loop.

224
www.magix.com
Show object marker > Show bar marker/harmony marker
After using the Remix agent or the Harmony Agent, the analysed material receives
beat and harmony information which is then shown in the arranger via these
commands.
Shortcut: Bar Marker Ctrl + Shift + F9
Harmony Markers Ctrl + Shift + F10
Beat Markers Ctrl + Shift + F11

Media Pool
Show Media Pool...
This option hides or displays the Media Pool.
Shortcut: F2
Media Pool views / template folders
Opens the corresponding folder in the Media Pool.
It's even easier to access the corresponding Media Pool views and folders via the
corresponding keyboard shortcut.
Video monitor
Show video monitor
Opens and closes the video window.
Shortcut: F3
Full-screen Video Monitor
This option shows the video preview monitor in full-screen mode. The right mouse
button opens the context menu, the Esc-key returns you to normal viewing mode.
Shortcut: Alt + Enter
Video output
This option switches the preview monitor on or off to display the existing video
objects in the Arranger.
Shortcut: Shift + F3
Arrangement overview
With this option you can display an overview of the entire arrangement on the video
screen. It is particularly suitable for long and complex arrangements to prevent you
from losing track.

View menu 225

You can view the whole arrangement and and still be able to access the sought-after
object in a split second – you can zoom in directly on the video monitor or move
around the clip displayed in the Arranger.

The function can also be opened via "Overview" on the
video monitor.
Shortcut: Shift + F2
Audio peakmeter

The video monitor is transformed into an analyzer which displays the
sound as a graphic.

Shortcut: Shift + F4
Infobox

The InfoBox mode shows help text in the preview monitor if you hold
the mouse pointer over a button on the screen.
Shortcut: Shift + F1
Mix
Mixer
With this option you can open and close the real-time mixer. Further information can
be found in the Mixer (view page 179) chapter.
Shortcut: M
Master audio effect rack
Opens or closes the master effects rack; you can also use the "Master FX" button in
the mixer window for this.
Shortcut: B

226
www.magix.com
The "Share" menu
The Share menu provides access to online social networks as well as transfer
functions to other MAGIX programs.
Here you'll find options for uploading individual objects in the arranger or files from
the Media Pool as well as the entire arrangement, as audio or video. You can also
transfer your arrangement to another MAGIX program (if it is installed) e.g. to use it
as background music for your slideshow.
Community upload
The menu entries featured under "File" > "Export" >"Community upload" or via the
Export assistant allow you to upload the finished song to different web communities.
Upload arrangement as MP3 to MAGIX Online Album
Converts your arrangement into an MP3 file and uploads it to your personal MAGIX
Online Album.
Upload video to Facebook.
Uploads he current arrangement to Facebook. You can find additional information
under Export to Facebook (view page 187).
Upload video to YouTube
Uploads the current arrangement to YouTube. See Export to YouTube (view page
187) for details.
Shortcut: Shift + Y
Upload audio to Soundcloud.
Uploads the arrangement to the Soundcloud music platform. You can find additional
information under Upload audio to Soundcloud (view page 188).
Sending your arrangement as an email.
This option creates a compressed file in Windows Media format. Your mail program
is activated simultaneously and the created file of an opened message is added as an
attachment. This lets you compress and send your arrangement immediately without
having to go through any intermediate steps.
Present music on magix.info
Opens an Internet browser at the MAGIX Online World media upload page. There
you can choose the file you would like to present on the website.
Note: You first have to export (view page 183) your arrangement.

The "Share" menu 227

Use as background music
Converts your arrangement into MP3 format and sends it to one of the specified
programs, where it can be used as background music.
• Video easy 3 SE
• Video easy 3 HD
• Movie Edit Pro MX HD
• Movie Edit Pro MX Plus HD
• Movie Edit Pro MX Premium HD
• Photo Manager 10
• Photo Manager 10 deluxe
• Photo Manager MX
• Photo Manager MX deluxe
Note: This function is only available if you have at least one of the above programs
installed.
Add to music collection
Converts your arrangement into MP3 format and sends it directly to a MAGIX music
management program (e. g. MP3 deluxe MX), where it is added to an existing music
collection.
Note: This function is only available if you have installed an appropriate MAGIX
program.
Edit audio objects in external editors
Converts your arrangement into WAV format and sends it directly to one of the
specified programs where it can be edited further.
• Music Editor
• Audio Cleaning Lab
Note: This function is only available if you have at least one of the above programs
installed.

228
www.magix.com
Burn audio to CD-R(W)
Your arrangement will be sent to MAGIX Speed burnR, where it can be burned as an
audio CD. The Premium version offers you MAGIX Music Editor.
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + C
Burn arrangement and used media onto
CD/DVD-R(W)
You arrangement will be sent to MAGIX Speed burnR, where it can be burned to CD
or DVD.
Shortcut: Ctrl + B

Help Menu 229

Help Menu
Show welcome dialog
With this command you can display the "Welcome" dialog again. There, you have a
quick access to important functions during program start.
Documentation
Content
Use the command "Content" in the "Help" menu to open the start page of the help
file. You can read through the help file step-by-step and jump to specific sections via
the tree structure on the right hand side.
PDF manual
Opens the manual in PDF format.
Context Help mouse mode
The mouse cursor will turn into an arrow with a question mark.
Click on any button of the main screen, to open program help which will describe the
control element in question.
Shortcut: Alt + F1
Display tooltips
Tooltips are small information windows that open up automatically if the mouse
pointer stops briefly on a button or some other area. They provide information about
the function of the button. These information boxes can be switched on or off with
this option.
Start introductory video
The introductory video shows you how all the most important features work. Specific
topics are explained in detail in additional tutorial videos.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + F1
To play the introductory video you may have to insert the program CD.
Watch more tutorials online...
Opens the magix.info with online tutorial videos.

230
www.magix.com
Update program / Upgrade functions
Register online
This option opens the MAGIX homepage for online registration where you can
register yourself as a MAGIX user.
Registration grants you access to the MAGIX support website
http://support.magix.net (see support) where various program updates and help
programs can be downloaded.
With the registration form supplied (start menu under "MAGIX Music Maker 2013 ->
Service and support -> Register") you can register via post or fax. Simply print it out,
fill it in, and send it off!
Keyboard shortcut: F12
Online Update
Connects directly to the online update page where you can get the latest version of
your program.
magix.info - Multimedia Knowledge Community
Help others and find help Directly from within the program you'll be able to access
magix.info – the new MAGIX knowledge base. You'll find answers to all the most
frequently asked questions about MAGIX products and multimedia in general.
Couldn't find an answer to your particular question? No problem, just ask the
question yourself.
Ask the Knowledge Community a question online
Ask magix.info a question.
Find knowledge & workshops
Have a look at the newest workshops at magix.info and read useful tips from other
MAGIX Music Maker 2013 users.
Present music on magix.info
Opens an Internet browser at the MAGIX Online World media upload page. There
you can choose the file you would like to present on the website.
Note: You first have to export (view page 183) your arrangement.
Open magix.info - Multimedia Community
Opens the magix.info main page.

Help Menu 231

MAGIX Screenshare
This function makes it possible for you to offer assistance to other users directly via
the Internet, or to get help from others. To do this, you have to register MAGIX Music
Maker 2013 first.
Hint: To inform the screensharing guests of exactly what is being shown, it is also a
good idea to telephone or chat simultaneously.
Register as host for a screen transfer
1. If you want to start a screenshare instance yourself, then you have to register
as a host first. To do this, open the menu "Share" and then select "Screen
transfer as host...".
2. In the dialog you can enter a name for the screen session. Your user account
name is used here by default.
3. Now click on "Start session". A small window will now open in the bottom
right corner which displays the status of your screen session. A number will
also be displayed (session ID) which serves as a password for your guests.
4. Start the screenshare instance.
Register as guest of a screen session
1. You have to register as a guest to view a screensharing instance. To do this,
open the menu "Share" and then select "Screen transfer as guest...".
2. Enter the password you received from your host (8-digit session ID).
3. Now click on "Start session". A window will open displaying a smaller version
of your host's screen.
About MAGIX Music Maker 2013
Displays copyright info and version number of MAGIX Music Maker 2013.

232
www.magix.com
Buttons overview and keyboard shortcuts
Toolbar

New arrangement Load arrangement

Save arrangement Settings (view page 204, view page 203)


magix.info Redo action

Undo last action (Undo) Split Object

Select mouse mode (view page
48)



Keyboard shortcuts
In MAGIX Music Maker 2013, there are many functions for which key commands can
be used to open your desired program at the touch of a button. In detail:
• Menu and object context menu entries
• Functions of the Media Pools (Options menu)
• The video monitor menu
• Move and zoom of the arranger view
• Playback control (Moving the playback marker and the playback area)
• Mouse modes
• Smart preview function (Previewing Media Pool files in the arrangement context)
File menu
Load/Save arrangement
New arrangement Ctrl + N
Load arrangement Ctrl + O
Save arrangement Ctrl + S
Save arrangement as Shift + S
Import
Import Audio CD track(s) C
Audio recording R
Export
Common export options X

Buttons overview and keyboard shortcuts 233

Burn audio to CD-R(W) Shift + C
Audio as Wave/ADPCM Shift + W
Audio as MP3 Shift + M
Audio as OGG Vorbis Shift + O
Audio as Windows Media Shift + E
Audio as AIFF Shift + I
Audio as FLAC Shift + F
Audio tracks as single waves Shift + U
Video as AVI Shift + A
Video as MAGIX video Shift + X
Video as Quicktime Movie Shift + Q
Video as Windows Media video Shift + V
Picture as BMP Shift + B
Picture as JPEG Shift + J
Upload Video to YouTube Shift + Y
Upload audio to MySpace Shift + S
Backup copy
Save arrangement and used media Ctrl + Alt + S
Save arrangement and used media
(audio as OGG Vorbis)
Ctrl + Shift + C
Burn arrangement and used media
onto CD/DVD-R(W)
Ctrl + B
Burn manually selected files to
CD/DVD
Ctrl + Alt + B
Settings
Program settings P
Arrangement settings A
Audio recording R
Keyboard shortcuts U
Exit Alt + F4

Edit menu
undo Ctrl + Z
Restore Ctrl + Y
Select all Ctrl + A
Object
Record new audio object R
New MIDI object Ctrl + Alt + N
Text to speech Ctrl + T
Create a new title object Alt + Shift + T

234
www.magix.com
Cut Ctrl + X
Copy Ctrl + C
duplicating Ctrl+D
Insert Ctrl + V
Multiple insert Ctrl + "Num+"
Delete Del
Select all Ctrl + A
Split T
Save objects as takes Alt + Shift + S
Group objects Ctrl+G
Ungroup objects Ctrl+U
Object properties Ctrl+P
Range
Cut Ctrl+Alt+X
Copy Ctrl+Alt+C
Insert Ctrl + Alt + V
Multiple insert Ctrl + Alt + "Num+"
Delete Ctrl + Del
Extract Ctrl + Alt + E
Navigation: Set jump marker, move playback position (see Playback control), move
view (see Move arranger view (view page 236)).
Effects menu
Song Maker W
Audio
Master audio effects rack B
Text to speech Ctrl + Shift + T
Object effect rack E
10 Band Equalizer Q
Compressor Shift + D
Invert phase Ctrl + Shift + I
Echo/Reverb Shift + H
Distortion/Filter Shift + F
Gater Ctrl + G
Backwards Ctrl + Shift + R
Mute/Unmute Ctrl + M
Volume settings Ctrl + Shift + D
Normalize Shift + N
Timestretch/pitchshift Shift + P

Buttons overview and keyboard shortcuts 235

MIDI transposition Ctrl + T
Harmony Agent H
One pitch higher Num *
One pitch lower Num /
Create remix objects Shift + J
Remix Maker Shift + K
Loop Finder L
Remix Agent – Tempo and beat
recognition
J
Load audio effects Ctrl + Alt + O
Reset audio effects Ctrl + Alt + H
Convert stereo into two mono
objects
Shift + Z
Edit wave in external editor Ctrl + Shift + M
Video
Edit image in external editor Ctrl + Shift + B
Title
Title editor Ctrl + T
View menu
Zoom Soundpool and Keyboard Tab
Arranger
Arranger visible F4
Optimize view F12
Change object presentation Ctrl + Alt + Z
Show object marker
Bar marker Ctrl + Shift + F9
Harmony marker Ctrl + Shift + F10
Beat marker Ctrl + Shift + F11
Media Pool
Show Media Pool F2
Soundpool F5
File Browser F6
Synthesizers F7
Templates F8
Catooh O
Video monitor
Show video monitor F3

236
www.magix.com
Fullscreen video monitor Alt + Enter
Video output Shift + F3
Arrangement overview Shift + F2
Audio peakmeter Shift + F4
Info Box Shift + F1
Mix
Mixer M
Master audio effects rack B
Standard layout F11
Help menu
Context help mouse mode Alt + F1
About MAGIX Music Maker 2013 I
MIDI objects context menu
MIDI editor Ctrl + Shift + D
Track VSTi editor Ctrl + Shift + F
MIDI transposition Alt + Shift + D

Media Pool
Settings
Soundpool F5
File Browser F6
Synthesizer F7
Templates F8
Keyboard F9
Object inspector F10
Catooh O

Video Monitor
Show video monitor F3
Fullscreen video monitor Alt + Enter
Video output Shift + F3
Arrangement overview Shift + F2
Audio peakmeter Shift + F4
Info Box Shift + F1

Move Arranger view
Note: These commands similarly move the playback marker when it's stopped, the
marker always remains visible in the arrangement clip.
To next object edge Ctrl + 0
To the previous object edge Ctrl + 9
Go to beginning of arrangement Home
Go to end of arrangement end cap

Buttons overview and keyboard shortcuts 237

Go to start marker Ctrl + Home
Go to end marker Ctrl+End.
Page right/left Page Up/Down
Grid unit right/left Ctrl+PgUp/PgDn
Go to the next jump marker Ctrl + Shift + PgDn
Go to the previous jump marker Ctrl + Shift + PgUp

Arranger view - Increase/Reduce clip size (zoom)
Increase clip size (zoom in) Ctrl+Arrow up
Reduce clip size (zoom out) Ctrl+Arrow down
Zoom 1 frame Ctrl+1
Zoom 5 frames Ctrl+2
Zoom 1 sec Ctrl+3
Zoom 10 sec Ctrl+4
Zoom 1 min Ctrl+5
Zoom 10 min Ctrl+6
Zoom view between start and end
marker
Ctrl+7
Zoom over whole arrangement Ctrl+8
Increase track pitch Alt+Arrow up
Reduce track pitch Alt+Arrow down

Move playback control / playback marker / playback area
Start/Stop playback Space bar
Stop at position (stop playback,
move playback marker to current
position)
Escape
Set jump marker Shift+1...0
Playback marker to jump marker 1..0
Note: When stopped, the playback marker is moved to the jump marker (after the
end of the current loop).
Create jump marker sequence (10
markers with intervals equal to the
current playback area)
Ctrl+Shift+M
Delete all jump markers Alt+Shift+M
Move playback range Arrow left/right
Move playback one quarter of its
length
Ctrl+Arrow left/right
Double/Halve playback area length Shift+Arrow right/left
Double/Halve playback area length
by a bar
Ctrl+Shift+Arrow left/right

Mouse modes
Mouse modes for individual objects Alt + 1

238
www.magix.com
Connect objects in one track Alt + 2
Connect objects in all tracks Alt + 3
Curve mouse mode Alt + 4
Draw objects Alt + 5
Splitting objects Alt + 6
Object stretch mouse mode Alt + 7
Preview objects mode Alt + 8
Scrub mode Alt + 9
Replace mouse mode Alt + 0

Preview/Smart preview
Preview of pitches Numbers 0..9
Change preview object Arrow keys
Insert into arrangement Enter
Delete smart preview object Del


If you still have questions 239

If you still have questions
Tips for program help
The "Help" file features hints on how to use the program and additional information.
Many important terms are indicated in the text in italics and clicking on them displays
an explanation.
Context help: Press the "F1" key at any point in the opened program and the help file
will open with the matching topic (context help).
Search function: Use the search function to find out information about specific words.
Enter either the individual word or use logical operators (OR, AND, NEAR) to refine
your search if you have several search words.
• "OR" (between two words): All topics which contain both words or one of the
words will be listed.
• "AND" (between two words): Only those topics will be listed which contain both
words.
• "NEAR" (between two words): Only those topics will be listed which contain both
words. A maximum of six other words may be added between the search terms.
• "NOT" (before a word): Topics which contain this word will not be listed.
Print: Use the help program's print function to make a printout of individual topics or
entire sections. The print button is located at the top of the help window in the
toolbar.
Uninstalling the program
If you would like to uninstall MAGIX Music Maker 2013, you can do this in the control
panel under "Software" or go to "Programs > MAGIX > MAGIX Music Maker 2013 >
Service and Support > Uninstall MAGIX Music Maker 2013".
System Requirements
For Microsoft
®
Windows
®
7 | XP
®
| Vista
Minimum configuration:
• PC with 2 GHz processor
• 1 GB RAM (2 GB recommended)
• Free hard disk space: 6 GB
• Minimum screen resolution 1024 x 768 pixels
• Sound card

240
www.magix.com
• DVD drive
Optional:
• Burn CDs/DVDs with a CD/DVD±R(W) burner
• MP3 export with Windows Media
®
Player 10 or higher
Serial number
A serial number is included in each product. This serial number is required for the
installation of the software and enables usage of additional bonus services. Please
store this number in a safe place.
What can a serial number do?
With a serial number your program is clearly assigned to you and only you. This will
allow you take advantage of the free email support service. Serial numbers also help
to protect against software piracy which ensures that we are able to continually
provide our customers with an optimal price/performance ratio.
Where can the serial number be found?
The serial number can be found on the reverse side of your CD/DVD case. If your
product is packed in a DVD box, you'll find the serial number on the inside.
If you have purchased the download version, you will receive a confirmation email
with the serial number.
When will you need the serial number?
The serial number is required when you start or register the program for the first time.
Note: We explicitly recommend registering your product (free), since only then are
you entitled to download updates and to use MAGIX support services (view page 4)
or activate codecs.

If you still have questions 241

Publishing works created in MAGIX Music
Maker 2013
What needs to be taken into account when publishing a music or video
production?
A distinction is made between "non-commercial use" and "commercial use".
1. What constitutes non-commercial use?
If songs are created with MAGIX Music Maker 2013 or if music is added to private
videos, they can be shared with others on social networks (e.g. YouTube, Facebook,
Soundcloud, Twitter or personal blogs/websites). The decisive factor in these cases is
that no money is made or will be made from the song or video soundtrack.
Examples of non-commercial use:
• A user creates a song with Music Maker and uploads it to their SoundCloud page
or YouTube channel.
• A user produces a song using Music Maker, burns it to CD then sends it to their
friends.
2. What constitutes commercial use?
Commercial use refers to videos with soundtracks or songs created using Music
Maker for commercial purposes. Commercial use if if sales are made, if revenue is
accrued through advertising (e.g. as a YouTube partner or through the process of
monetizing) or if contracts are concluded. In this case the necessary licenses must be
purchased from Catooh The Online Media Marketplace
http://www.catooh.com/de/sys/id/search/?&search[mode]=fast&search[keyword
s]=music%20maker&search[category]=8563.
Examples of commercial use:
• A user creates a song in MAGIX Music Maker and uploads it to their YouTube
channel, which they've enabled for advertising (YouTube Partner Program).
• A user produces a song in MAGIX Music Maker and makes it available for
purchase from an online download shop (e.g. iTunes, Musicload).
• A musician produces a song with MAGIX Music Maker for a CD Compilation,
which is sold at concerts.
• A user makes a video in which they advertise their company or one of their
company's products.
Important: The downloadable styles in Catooh that are licensed for commercial use
consist of high quality WAV files. Any "normal" Music Maker content from the
installation DVD is in .ogg format for space reasons.

242
www.magix.com
More about MAGIX
MAGIX Online World
MAGIX Online World from MAGIX offers you a range of new services for your
photos, videos, and music that are accessible directly from the "Share" menu in
MAGIX Music Maker 2013:
MAGIX Online Album
MAGIX Online Album (view page 199) is your personal multimedia album on the
Internet. If you want to present slideshows or videos online, then MAGIX Online
Album is the perfect service.
MAGIX Website Maker
MAGIX Website Maker helps you create a personal Internet showcase with a
professional design in just a few mouse clicks – without prior knowledge, including
your own chosen domain and email address. Publish slideshows and videos and
accessorize your site with music and various effects – anything from a simple
business card to a fireworks display of effects, professional or private – show your
best side!
More about this topic can be found under MAGIX Website Maker. (view page 201)
Catooh – the Online Content Library
If your project is missing pictures, videos, DVD menus, sounds, or samples, then you
should have a look at the huge selection available at Catooh. There you'll be able to
buy media in excellent quality for low prices: DVD menus, Slideshow Maker styles,
decorative elements, 3D power effects, 3D transition series, MAGIX Soundpools,
songs, ringtones... Perfectly suited to all MAGIX photo, video, and music projects.
magix.info
Do you have questions, need help, or are looking for expert tips and tutorial videos on
using your MAGIX product? At magix.info you will find answers and solutions as well
as workshops and a comprehensive user forum for software and multimedia queries.
You can access magix.info online at www.magix.info

More about MAGIX 243

Soundpool DVD Collection
MAGIX Music Maker 2013 includes thousands of sound and video building blocks.
Other media can be ordered later. MAGIX Sound Essentials includes professionally
produced loops and samples in impressive quality – the ideal enhancement for the
most varying of music styles, including:
• Ambient
• Big Beat
• Easy listening
• Dance / Electro
• Disco / House
• Soundtrack
• Hip hop
• Rock/Pop
• Techno / trance
• Special effects

In the upper menu bar under "Tasks" > "Discover more", you can order the MAGIX
Sound Essentials directly.
Tip: At www.magix.com you'll always find the latest soundpool offers.

244
www.magix.com
Index
6
6 Band Equalizer................................................................................................... 134, 139, 180
A
About MAGIX Music Maker 2013 .....................................................................................231
Add to music collection........................................................................................................ 227
Add track...................................................................................................................................213
Add videos or images.............................................................................................................. 27
Adding software instruments ............................................................................................... 25
Additional Audio Effects ......................................................................................................... 17
Additional editing................................................................................................................... 189
Additional features new in the Premium version ............................................................. 13
Additional features of the Premium version ...................................................................... 17
Additional Instruments............................................................................................................ 17
Additional Styles & Samples.................................................................................................. 17
Additional Vita Solo Instruments....................................................................................... 128
Adjusting the Signal Level...............................................................................................59, 60
Adjusting volume/brightness............................................................................................... 54
Advanced settings for audio recordings ............................................................................. 61
Also in the Premium version.................................................................................................. 18
Analog Delay............................................................................................................................157
Analog delay parameter ........................................................................................................157
Apply (destructive editing) ...........................................................................................67, 137
Arrange MIDI objects ............................................................................................................. 80
Arrangement overview.........................................................................................................224
Arrangement settings ...........................................................................................................203
Arranger.............................................................................................................................30, 223
Arranger buttons...................................................................................................................... 37
Arranger view - Increase/Reduce clip size (zoom) ...................................................... 237
Arranger visible ...................................................................................................................... 223
Arranging Objects..................................................................................................... 48, 51, 175
Articulation.............................................................................................................................. 129
Ask the Knowledge Community a question online.......................................................230
Atmos........................................................................................................................................ 124
Audio.................................................................................................................. 58, 81, 206, 217
Audio & MIDI ............................................................................................................................. 15
Audio as AIFF.......................................................................................................................... 194
Audio as FLAC........................................................................................................................ 194
Audio as MP3...........................................................................................................................193
Audio as Ogg Vorbis..............................................................................................................193
Audio as WAV/ADPCM...................................................................................................... 192
Audio as Windows Media ................................................................................................... 194
Audio effects ......................................................................................... 44, 104, 132, 180, 217
Audio Effects.............................................................................................................................. 14
Audio export dialog ................................................................................................................ 191

Index 245

Audio formats............................................................................................................................57
Audio Loops and MIDI Loops............................................................................................... 40
Audio object effects........................................................................................................46, 133
Audio Objects.................................................................................................................... 46, 57
Audio peakmeter .......................................................................................................... 174, 225
Audio recording...................................................................................................... 58, 191, 204
Audio recording dialog.................................................................................... 32, 35, 60, 218
Audio tracks as single waves...............................................................................................194
Automatic tempo adjustment when loading.................................................................... 65
Automatic volume damping ................................................................................................ 218
Automation of Vita and Vita Solo instruments ..............................................................130
B
Backup .......................................................................................................................................198
Backwards................................................................................................................................. 147
Bass amp.................................................................................................................................... 171
Bass section (lower pane).....................................................................................................114
BeatBox 2........................................................................................................................... 14, 105
BitMachine ............................................................................................................................... 165
Build or split object groups.....................................................................................................52
Burn arrangement and used media onto CD/DVD-R(W)................................. 199, 228
Burn audio CD ........................................................................................................ 29, 184, 189
Burn audio to CD-R(W)............................................................................................... 191, 228
Burn manually selected files to CD/DVD-R (W)...........................................................199
Buttons overview and keyboard shortcuts...................................................................... 232
C
Catooh – the Online Content Library........................................................38, 47, 202, 242
CD Manager............................................................................................................................... 61
CD/DVD drive list ....................................................................................................................63
CD/DVD-ROM configuration.............................................................................................. 64
Cell mode.......................................................................................................................... 99, 100
Change tempo or pitch of individual objects manually ................................................. 66
Change the playback tempo or pitch.................................................................................. 65
Check and correct the automatic harmony recognition.................................................78
Checking the automatic tempo recognition ..................................................................... 70
Chorus ....................................................................................................................................... 162
Chorus flanger parameters................................................................................................... 152
Chorus parameters................................................................................................................. 163
Chorus/Flanger ........................................................................................................................ 151
Common export options........................................................................................................191
Community upload....................................................................................................... 187, 226
Compressor.............................................................................................................................. 138
Connect external equipment ..........................................................................................81, 131
Connecting the source for recording.................................................................................. 58
Console......................................................................................................................................149
Content..................................................................................................................................... 229
Context help.............................................................................................................................. 50
Context Help mouse mode ................................................................................................. 229

246
www.magix.com
Context menu.......................................................................................................................... 107
Control groups ........................................................................................................................ 180
Controller editor - Selecting and editing events ........................................85, 87, 90, 131
Controller Editor Hints............................................................................................................. 91
Convert MIDI objects into audio files........................................................................... 81, 83
Convert stereo into two mono objects..............................................................................221
Copy objects.............................................................................................................................212
Copy range............................................................................................................................... 214
Copyright....................................................................................................................................... 2
Create a new MIDI object..................................................................................................... 211
Create a new object................................................................................................................ 211
Create a new title object ....................................................................................................... 211
Create jump marker sequence.............................................................................................215
Create Remix objects ............................................................................................................ 219
Creating an arrangement ....................................................................................................... 23
Cut...............................................................................................................................................212
Cut range.................................................................................................................................. 214
D
Database .................................................................................................................................... 43
Delay (echo)............................................................................................................................ 145
Delete all jump markers ....................................................................................................... 216
Delete range ............................................................................................................................ 214
Deleting objects.......................................................................................................................212
Deleting, copying, and moving files..................................................................................... 42
Determining the start of a measure .................................................................................... 73
DirectX and VST plug-ins ....................................................................................................... 18
Display tooltips.......................................................................................................................229
Distortion ........................................................................................................................ 145, 164
Documentation.......................................................................................................................229
Download media .................................................................................................................... 201
Draw............................................................................................................................................ 49
Drum Editor ........................................................................................................................84, 99
Drum Editor trackbox............................................................................................................ 100
Drum kit.................................................................................................................................... 107
Drum Map Editor ................................................................................................................... 102
Drum Maps............................................................................................................................... 101
Drum section (top half)..........................................................................................................113
Duplicate objects .............................................................................................................53, 212
E
Edit audio objects in external editors................................................................................ 227
Edit image in external editor ............................................................................................... 222
Edit in external editor ............................................................................................................ 222
Edit menu ................................................................................................................................. 233
Edit Menu.................................................................................................................................. 211
Edit notes with the mouse ..................................................................................................... 90
Editing Objects................................................................................................................... 24, 27
Editing velocity values ......................................................................................... 108, 109, 110

Index 247

Effect curves............................................................................................................................. 134
Effect devices controls .......................................................................................................... 132
Effects ................................................................................................................................. 27, 132
Effects menu ........................................................................................................................... 234
Effects plug-ins............................................................................................................... 137, 149
Enhancer .................................................................................................................................. 140
Equalizer.................................................................................................................................... 137
essential FX..................................................................................................................... 129, 149
essentialFX presets ................................................................................................................150
Event display filters ........................................................................................................... 81, 87
Events above or below the currently visible selection................................................... 88
Exit ..............................................................................................................................................210
Export................................................................................................................................. 183, 191
Export Arrangement ................................................................................................................28
Export as E-Mail attachment...............................................................................................184
Export as ringtone.......................................................................................................... 184, 193
Export to Facebook....................................................................................................... 187, 226
Export to YouTube .............................................................................................. 184, 187, 226
Export wizard................................................................................................183, 191, 226, 230
External synthesizers................................................................................................ 80, 82, 83
Extract range............................................................................................................................ 215
Extract sound from videos.................................................................................................... 176
F
Fader .......................................................................................................................................... 179
File manager settings............................................................................................................... 41
File menu.................................................................................................................................. 232
File Menu ..................................................................................................................................190
Fill mode......................................................................................................................................76
Filter ................................................................................................................................. 146, 160
Filter parameters......................................................................................................................161
Find knowledge & workshops............................................................................................. 230
Find media and download in the arrangement... ........................................................... 202
Find out more about MAGIX Online World ................................................................... 203
Flanger ....................................................................................................................................... 159
Flanger parameters ................................................................................................................ 159
Folders .......................................................................................................61, 62, 192, 195, 209
Formats and interfaces...................................................................................................... 15, 16
Full-screen Video Monitor .................................................................................................. 224
Fundamentals .......................................................................................................................... 142
FX tracks ........................................................................................................................... 135, 181
G
Gater ..........................................................................................................................................146
General ..................................................................................................................................... 203
General info on AVI videos ..................................................................................................196
General notes on AVI videos...................................................................................... 177, 196
General options.............................................................................................................. 39, 204
Grid...............................................................................................................................................33

248
www.magix.com
Group objects...........................................................................................................................213
Grouping....................................................................................................................................213
Guitar amp............................................................................................................................... 170
H
Harmony Agent ......................................................................................................... 16, 77, 219
Help menu................................................................................................................................236
Help Menu ...............................................................................................................................229
High-end 32-bit floating point............................................................................................... 15
Highlight loop area................................................................................................................. 223
I
If you still have questions.....................................................................................................239
Import................................................................................................................. 15, 66, 190, 205
Import audio CD............................................................................................................... 61, 190
Import audio CD tracks ........................................................................................................ 190
Import media backup............................................................................................................203
Infobox ............................................................................................................................. 175, 225
InfoBox......................................................................................................................................... 16
Information ............................................................................................................................. 204
Input........................................................................................................................................... 169
Insert range.............................................................................................................................. 214
Insert segment multiple times............................................................................................ 214
Inserting multiple objects .....................................................................................................212
Inserting objects......................................................................................................................212
Instrument settings .................................................................................................................44
Internet ..................................................................................................................................... 199
Internet upload to many platforms....................................................................................... 17
Introduction................................................................................................................................ 12
Invert phase.............................................................................................................................. 141
K
Keyboard settings .................................................................................................................... 45
Keyboard shortcuts .................................................................................... 45, 109, 209, 232
L
Language ................................................................................................................................. 209
List Editor ............................................................................................................. 84, 87, 88, 92
Live monitoring......................................................................................................... 32, 58, 182
Live Sessions .............................................................................................................................. 17
LiViD - Little Virtual Drummer ............................................................................................ 115
Load and process audio files ................................................................................................. 57
Load arrangement .................................................................................................................. 190
Load backup arrangement ................................................................................................... 198
Load MIDI files.......................................................................................................................... 80
Load title template................................................................................................................. 222
Load video effects .................................................................................................................. 222

Index 249

Load/Save................................................................................................................................. 136
Load/Save/Reset audio effects .......................................................................................... 221
Loading and editing videos and bitmaps .......................................................................... 175
Loading and saving arrangements........................................................................................ 51
Loop Designer.................................................................................................................. 103, 112
overview................................................................................................................................. 112
Loop finder................................................................................................................ 65, 66, 220
Loop Finder.................................................................................................................................77
Loop range................................................................................................................................ 213
M
MAGIX Mastering Suite 2.0.................................................................................................. 18
MAGIX Music Editor ............................................................................................................... 18
MAGIX Online Album........................................................................................ 184, 199, 242
MAGIX Online World........................................................................................................... 242
MAGIX Plug-Ins......................................................................................................................149
MAGIX Screenshare.............................................................................................................. 231
MAGIX Vita ............................................................................................................................. 126
MAGIX Website Maker.............................................................................................. 201, 242
magix.info ................................................................................................................................ 242
magix.info - Multimedia Knowledge Community......................................................... 230
Manage login details............................................................................................................. 203
Master audio effect rack..............................................................................................217, 225
Master effects.......................................................................................................................... 134
Master Effects ......................................................................................................................... 136
Master track............................................................................................................................. 182
Media database......................................................................................................................... 15
Media Pool.............................................................................................................. 38, 224, 236
Media Pool views / template folders ............................................................................... 224
Menu effects............................................................................................................................ 217
Metronome.................................................................................................................................36
MIDI cabling...............................................................................................................................82
MIDI Editor................................................................................................................................ 84
MIDI Editor shortcuts..............................................................................................................97
MIDI editor techniques ...........................................................................................................97
MIDI functions................................................................................................................... 93, 95
MIDI objects ............................................................................................................................. 46
MIDI Objects .................................................................................25, 31, 38, 45, 55, 80, 126
MIDI objects context menu ................................................................................................ 236
MIDI Record options.........................................................................................32, 35, 86, 125
MIDI transposition ................................................................................................................. 218
Mix............................................................................................................................................. 225
Mixdown audio..........................................................................................................55, 83, 214
Mixdown audio........................................................................................................ 67, 137, 214
Mixer.....................................................................................................16, 30, 36, 37, 179, 225
More about MAGIX.............................................................................................................. 242
Mouse modes........................................................................................................ 48, 232, 237
Move all...................................................................................................................................... 48
Move Arranger view...........................................................................................215, 234, 236
Move playback control / playback marker / playback area....................................... 237
Move playback marker............................................................................................................35

250
www.magix.com
Move playback position ........................................................................................................215
Move screen view...................................................................................................................215
Move selection ......................................................................................................................... 48
Move to track............................................................................................................................ 48
Move/Zoom with the mouse wheel ................................................................................... 33
Move/Zoom with the scroll bar........................................................................................... 32
Moving and zooming............................................................................................................... 90
Multimedia files and objects.................................................................................................. 51
Multimedia Library ................................................................................................................... 14
Mute objects ............................................................................................................................. 52
Mute/Unmute......................................................................................................................... 218
Muted events display.............................................................................................................. 88
My MP3s.................................................................................................................................... 43
My Projects................................................................................................................................ 43
N
Navigation.................................................................................................................................215
Navigation buttons .................................................................................................................. 42
New arrangement .................................................................................................................. 190
Non real-time effects .............................................................................................................133
Normalize................................................................................................................................. 218
Notation display, movement, zoom.................................................................................... 87
Note display in the piano roll and the controller editor (with velocity curves) ....... 87
O
Object......................................................................................................................................... 211
Object and master effects rack ......................................................................... 134, 136, 217
Object and track curve automation...................................................................................... 18
Object effect rack....................................................................................................................217
Object Effects...........................................................................................................................135
Object fades .............................................................................................................................. 53
Object handles.......................................................................................................................... 53
Object Inspector settings....................................................................................................... 45
Object properties .............................................................................................................55, 213
Object Volume.........................................................................................................................136
Objects with stereo imaging ............................................................................................... 223
One pitch higher/lower ........................................................................................................ 219
Online Update.........................................................................................................................230
Open magix.info - Multimedia Community ....................................................................230
Open my online album.......................................................................................................... 201
Opening the Remix Maker..................................................................................................... 75
Opening the synthesizers .................................................................................................... 104
Optimize view.................................................................................................................. 33, 223
Overview...................................................................................................................................175
Overview of the program interface ..................................................................................... 20
Own recordings ......................................................................................................................... 15

Index 251

P
Parameter Smoothing............................................................................................................150
Parameters ............................................................................................................................... 143
Pattern editor - matrix...........................................................................................................108
Pattern editor buttons ...........................................................................................................108
PDF manual ............................................................................................................................. 229
Phaser ........................................................................................................................................ 153
Phaser parameters.................................................................................................................. 153
Piano Roll - Edit events.................................................................................................... 85, 88
Picture as JPG..........................................................................................................................198
Play demo project ..................................................................................................................... 21
Play object/Play arrangement............................................................................................. 137
Play/ PlaySolo........................................................................................................................... 85
Playback area, Start and end markers ........................................................... 32, 34, 57, 68
Playing and recording MIDI synthesizer.............................................................................83
Playing instruments with the keyboard.............................................................................. 86
Preface........................................................................................................................................... 3
Preparation - Setting the start marker and object end................................................... 70
Present music on magix.info..................................................................................... 226, 230
Presets ............................................................................................................................... 76, 144
Preview audio............................................................................................................................ 49
Preview function .......................................................................................................................38
Preview/Smart preview....................................................................................................... 238
Previewing and loading sounds.............................................................................................23
Problems and Remedies regarding the Auto Remix Assistant .....................................75
Program settings.......................................................................................... 43, 204, 210, 232
Publishing works created in MAGIX Music Maker 2013.............................................241
Q
Quantization grid ( ...................................................................................................................93
Quantization settings ............................................................... 85, 92, 94, 95, 96, 101, 102
Quantize......................................................................................................................................93
Quantize controller events............................................................................................. 92, 96
Quick start .............................................................................................................................. 3, 21
Quick start via preset selection...........................................................................................169
R
Rack effects (FX1/FX2)......................................................................................................... 172
Range .........................................................................................................................................214
Real 5.1 Surround Sound ......................................................................................................... 18
Real-time effects..................................................................................................................... 132
Record a new object................................................................................................................ 211
Recording Audio CDs ....................................................................................................65, 206
Redo ............................................................................................................................................ 211
Register as guest of a screen session................................................................................ 231
Register as host for a screen transfer................................................................................ 231
Register online........................................................................................................................ 230

252
www.magix.com
Remix......................................................................................................................................... 219
Remix agent - Tempo and beat assignment ........................................................... 69, 220
Remix Maker ...........................................................................................................75, 219, 220
Remove user-defined loop....................................................................................................213
Reordering................................................................................................................................ 147
Replace........................................................................................................................................ 50
Reprocess arrangement....................................................................................... 183, 192, 196
Requirements for using the Remix Agent.......................................................................... 70
Reset Program Settings to Default... ................................................................................. 210
Reset video effects................................................................................................................. 222
Reverb ...............................................................................................................................129, 142
Revolta 2...................................................................................................................................... 18
Robota........................................................................................................................................ 116
S
Save arrangement .................................................................................................................. 190
Save arrangement and used media ................................................................................... 198
Save arrangement and used media (audio as OGG Vorbis) ...................................... 199
Save arrangement as... .......................................................................................................... 190
Save objects as takes .............................................................................................................213
Save only Tempo & Beat information................................................................................. 73
Save title template................................................................................................................. 222
Save video effects .................................................................................................................. 222
Schematic illustration of the Robota synthesis....................................................... 117, 118
Scrubbing ................................................................................................................................... 49
Search the database................................................................................................................ 43
Select all objects..................................................................................................................... 216
Select objects ............................................................................................................................ 52
Select sounds ............................................................................................................................ 85
Selecting MIDI events...................................................................................................... 87, 89
Sending your arrangement as an email. ..................................................................198, 226
Sequencer......................................................................................................................... 100, 121
Serial number ......................................................................................................................... 240
Set jump marker ......................................................................................................................215
Set pitch.................................................................................................................................... 219
Set user-defined loop.............................................................................................................213
Set volume ............................................................................................................................... 218
Setting Catooh......................................................................................................................... 47
Setting the manual and Onbeat/Offbeat........................................................................... 72
Settings ........................................................................................................... 43, 203, 210, 232
Setups, drum kits, presets, and patterns...........................................................................123
Shortening or looping objects............................................................................................... 53
Show Media Pool....................................................................................................................224
Show object marker > Show bar marker/harmony marker ........................................224
Show video monitor...............................................................................................................224
Show welcome dialog ...........................................................................................................229
Shuffle mode.............................................................................................................................. 76
Simplify object presentation ................................................................................................175
Single picture as BMP ........................................................................................................... 198
Smart preview for the included samples..................................................................... 38, 57
Software Instruments................................................................................ 24, 31, 38, 44, 103

Index 253

Some advice on creating ring tones................................................................................... 185
Song Maker .................................................................................................................16, 67, 217
Sound synthesis .......................................................................................................................116
Sound Warper ................................................................................................................ 129, 145
Soundpool DVD Collection................................................................................................. 243
Soundpool settings...................................................................................................................39
SoundVision......................................................................................................................... 17, 41
Split....................................................................................................................................... 49, 52
Split objects.............................................................................................................................. 212
Splitting objects.........................................................................................................................52
Standard layout ...................................................................................................................... 223
Start introductory video....................................................................................................... 229
Stereo Delay.............................................................................................................................154
Stereo delay parameters.......................................................................................................154
Stomp boxes ............................................................................................................................170
Stretch ........................................................................................................................................ 49
Support ................................................................................................................................ 4, 240
Switch to Drum Editor Mode and back. ........................................................................... 100
Synchronization......................................................................................................................204
Synth objects .......................................................................................................................... 104
Synthesizer .................................................................................................................................111
Synthesizer plug-ins............................................................................... 45, 55, 124, 129, 135
System Requirements........................................................................................................... 239
T
Takes........................................................................................................................... 40, 54, 213
Template settings............................................................................................................. 38, 44
Tempo..........................................................................................................................................36
Tempo & beat recognition................................................................................................... 220
Tempo adjustment ...................................................................................................................73
Tempo and pitch..................................................................................................................... 218
Text objects and title templates ......................................................................................... 176
Text to speech .......................................................................................................... 78, 211, 217
The.................................................................................................................................... 189, 226
The Features............................................................................................................................... 14
The track list dialog..................................................................................................................62
The Vita interface ................................................................................................................... 127
Time display...............................................................................................................................36
Timestretch and pitchshift ................................................................................................... 219
Timestretch/Resample .........................................................................................................148
Tips for program help ........................................................................................................... 239
Title............................................................................................................................................ 222
Title Editor ........................................................................................................27, 176, 211, 222
Title templates for YouTube................................................................................................188
Toolbar............................................................................................................................... 52, 232
Tools............................................................................................................................................. 91
Track........................................................................................................................................... 213
Track effects.................................................................................................. 134, 135, 149, 180
Track headers and Instrument icons ............................................. 30, 31, 35, 81, 134, 180
Tracks.......................................................................................................................................... 30
Transfer with Bluetooth ........................................................................................................ 185

254
www.magix.com
Transfer with Infrared ........................................................................................................... 186
Transport Bar (playback functions) ............................................................................. 22, 35
Transpose MIDI........................................................................................................................ 80
Tuner ......................................................................................................................................... 169
U
Undo ........................................................................................................................................... 211
Ungroup objects ............................................................................................................. 176, 213
Uninstalling the program......................................................................................................239
Update program / Upgrade functions..............................................................................230
Upload arrangement as MP3 to MAGIX Online Album..............................................226
Upload audio to Soundcloud. ..............................................................................................226
Upload song to Soundcloud ..............................................................................184, 188, 226
Upload video to Facebook....................................................................................................226
Upload video to YouTube ....................................................................................................226
USB-MIDI keyboards ............................................................................................................... 81
Use as background music .................................................................................................... 227
Use harmony recognition....................................................................................................... 78
Using audio effects .................................................................................................................133
Using BPM and beat detection............................................................................................. 73
Using plug-in effects ..................................................................................................... 135, 137
Using VST instruments......................................................................................... 85, 103, 125
V
Vandal - Amplifier.................................................................................................................. 170
Vandal SE ................................................................................................................................. 168
Various file list view modes................................................................................................... 42
Velocity..................................................................................................................................... 109
Video ............................................................................................................................... 208, 222
Video and bitmap formats................................................................................................... 174
Video and Bitmap Objects.......................................................................................... 174, 184
Video as AVI ........................................................................................................................... 196
Video as MAGIX video......................................................................................................... 196
Video as Quicktime Movie ...................................................................................................197
Video as Windows Media .......................................................................................... 194, 197
Video Compression................................................................................................................177
Video effects ............................................................................................................................176
Video export dialog ............................................................................................................... 195
Video monitor .........................................................................................................37, 174, 224
Video Monitor.........................................................................................................................236
Video output............................................................................................................................224
Video recording ......................................................................................................................... 18
Video scrubbing.......................................................................................................................176
View menu..................................................................................................................... 223, 235
Vintage Effects Suite................................................................................... 129, 135, 137, 156
Volume.......................................................................................................................................217
Volume control ......................................................................................................................... 36
Volume or filter progressions ............................................................................................. 147
Vpot Controls.......................................................................................................................... 150

Index 255

VST and DirectX audio plugins............................................................................................181
VST Plug-in Editor ...........................................................................................................85, 126
VST Support ............................................................................................................................... 16
W
Watch more tutorials online... ............................................................................................ 229
What are VST and DirectX plug-ins?......................................................................... 85, 125
What is MAGIX Music Maker 2013?.................................................................................. 12
What's new in MAGIX Music Maker 2013? ..................................................................... 12
Z
Zoom buttons ............................................................................................................................32
Zoom Soundpool and Keyboard ........................................................................................ 223
Zooming......................................................................................................................................32